WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway motor vehicle can
expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that
are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty
Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-800-247-9753 or by
contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement
kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................7
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................12
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .......................................................90
4STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................110
5MULTIMEDIA ...............................................................................................................................147
6SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................194
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................255
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................281
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................333
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................339
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................343
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY...........................................................8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.............8
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.................................................8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................... 12
Key Fob .............................................................12
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 15
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 16
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 17
How To Use Remote Start................................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode..............................18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped........................................................18
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped........................................................19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ..................................19
Remote Start Cancel Message........................19
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..... 19
To Arm The System .........................................20
To Disarm The System .....................................20
Rearming Of The System .................................20
DOORS.....................................................................21
Manual Door Locks — If Equipped ..................21
Power Door Locks — If Equipped.....................22
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........22
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit —
If Equipped........................................................24
Manual Sliding Side Door ................................24
Power Sliding Side Door — If Equipped...........25
Child Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors........................................................26
STEERING WHEEL ..................................................28
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column...................28
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped............28
SEATS ......................................................................29
Manual Adjustment
(Front Seats) — If Equipped ............................29
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................30
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped........................................................42
Heated Seats ...................................................44
Adjustable Armrest
(Front Seats) — If Equipped .............................45
Head Restraints ..............................................45
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION.........................48
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................48
Basic Voice Commands ...................................49
Get Started .......................................................49
Additional Information .....................................49
MIRRORS................................................................ 49
Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................49
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped ......50
Outside Mirrors ................................................51
Conversation Mirror .........................................51
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ..........................51
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature .....................52
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................ 52
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink® ......................................................52
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels............52
Identifying Whether You Have A
Rolling Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ......52
Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener........................................53
Programming HomeLink® To A
Miscellaneous Device......................................54
Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink® Button ..........................................54
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........54
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 55
Multifunction Lever ..........................................55
Headlight Switch...............................................56
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped........................................................56
High/Low Beam Switch....................................56
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................56
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..............56
Headlight Time Delay — If Equipped ...............57
Lights-On Reminder..........................................57
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .......................57
Turn Signals......................................................57
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................57
Battery Protection ............................................57
INTERIOR LIGHTS .................................................. 58
Interior Courtesy Lights ...................................58
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS ................ 59
Windshield Wiper Operation............................59
Rear Wiper And Washer...................................60
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................ 60
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................60
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
And Functions...................................................66
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .......................................................72
Climate Voice Commands................................72
Operating Tips .................................................72
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT ...............73
Storage..............................................................73
Sun Screens — If Equipped..............................77
USB/AUX Control..............................................78
Power Outlets ...................................................79
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped .............................81
Smoker's Package Kit — If Equipped .............81
WINDOWS...............................................................81
Power Windows ................................................81
Automatic Window Features ...........................82
Reset Auto Up...................................................82
Wind Buffeting..................................................83
HOOD .......................................................................83
Opening.............................................................83
Closing ..............................................................84
LIFTGATE .................................................................84
To Unlock/Open The Liftgate...........................84
To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................84
Power Liftgate — If Equipped...........................85
Cargo Area Features ........................................86
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK —
IF EQUIPPED ..........................................................86
Deploying The Crossbars .................................87
Stowing The Crossbars ....................................88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 90
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 91
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls.............................................................92
Oil Life Reset ...................................................93
KeySense Cluster Messages —
If Equipped .......................................................93
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ........94
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ......................................99
TRIP COMPUTER .................................................100
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................101
Red Warning Lights....................................... 101
Yellow Warning Lights................................... 104
Yellow Indicator Lights.................................. 107
Green Indicator Lights .................................. 107
White Indicator Lights................................... 107
Blue Indicator Lights..................................... 107
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ......108
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................... 108
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS .............................109
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 3
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ......................................110
Normal Starting ............................................. 110
AutoPark ........................................................ 111
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 113
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine..... 113
If Engine Fails To Start ................................. 113
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button...................................... 114
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED..........114
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS.........114
PARKING BRAKE .................................................115
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 115
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..............................118
Ignition Park Interlock................................... 119
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) System ................................................ 119
9-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 119
Gear Ranges .................................................. 120
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION ..........................122
POWER STEERING...............................................123
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............. 123
Autostop Mode .............................................. 123
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop......................................................... 124
To Start The Engine While In Auto
Stop/Start...................................................... 124
To Manually Turn Off The
Stop/Start System......................................... 124
To Manually Turn On The
Stop/Start System......................................... 125
System Malfunction ...................................... 125
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 125
Cruise Control................................................ 125
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 127
ParkSense Sensors....................................... 127
ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 128
ParkSense Display ........................................ 128
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 131
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System ................................................ 131
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 131
ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 131
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA............... 132
REFUELING THE VEHICLE................................... 134
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................. 134
Certification Label ......................................... 134
TRAILER TOWING ...............................................136
Common Towing Definitions......................... 136
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 138
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .............. 139
Vehicle Loading Chart................................... 139
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................... 141
Towing Requirements .................................. 141
Towing Tips ................................................... 143
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................144
Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle ............................................. 144
DRIVING TIPS .......................................................145
Driving On Slippery Surfaces........................ 145
Driving Through Water ................................. 145
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .........................................147
CYBERSECURITY .................................................147
UCONNECT SETTINGS .........................................148
Customer Programmable Features ............ 148
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION................................164
System Overview .......................................... 164
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ................................ 166
Safety And General Information .................. 166
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 4
5
UCONNECT MODES .............................................167
Steering Wheel Audio Controls..................... 167
Radio Mode .................................................. 168
Media Mode .................................................. 176
Phone Mode ................................................. 178
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED ........................................................189
Android Auto™ .............................................. 189
Apple CarPlay®.............................................. 191
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay®
Tips And Tricks............................................... 193
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES .....193
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 193
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..............................................194
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 194
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 195
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ..........................200
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped..................................................... 200
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
With Mitigation — If Equipped....................... 204
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ... 207
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ....................211
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 211
Important Safety Precautions....................... 211
Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 212
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 221
Child Restraints ............................................ 234
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 252
Transporting Passengers.............................. 252
Transporting Pets ........................................ 252
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ................................................... 252
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 253
Exhaust Gas................................................... 254
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 254
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS......................... 255
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED .... 255
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 259
Preparations For Jacking ............................. 259
Jack And Spare Tire Location ....................... 260
Equipment Removal ..................................... 260
Jacking Instructions ..................................... 261
Road Tire Installation.................................... 264
Portable Air Compressor —
If Equipped..................................................... 265
Return Inflatable Spare Tire ........................ 266
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .................... 267
JUMP STARTING.................................................. 272
Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 272
Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 273
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 274
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ........................... 275
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................276
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................277
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE .........................278
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ...................................................280
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................280
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................281
Maintenance Plan......................................... 282
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................285
3.6L Engine ................................................... 285
Checking Oil Level......................................... 286
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 286
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 286
Pressure Washing ......................................... 287
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................287
Engine Oil ...................................................... 288
Engine Oil Filter ............................................ 288
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................. 288
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection................... 289
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................... 290
Body Lubrication .......................................... 292
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................. 292
Exhaust System ............................................ 295
Cooling System.............................................. 296
Brake System ............................................... 299
Automatic Transmission .............................. 300
Fuses.............................................................. 300
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 309
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 5
6
TIRES ....................................................................311
Tire Safety Information ................................ 311
Tires — General Information ......................... 319
Tire Types....................................................... 323
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 323
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 325
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 327
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................. 328
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ....................329
Treadwear...................................................... 329
Traction Grades............................................. 329
Temperature Grades..................................... 329
STORING THE VEHICLE .......................................330
BODYWORK..........................................................330
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .......... 330
Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 330
Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 330
INTERIORS ...........................................................331
Seats And Fabric Parts.................................. 331
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 331
Leather Surfaces........................................... 332
Glass Surfaces .............................................. 332
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........ 333
BRAKE SYSTEM................................................... 333
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ 333
Torque Specifications ................................... 333
FUEL REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 334
3.6L Engine ................................................... 335
Reformulated Gasoline .............................. 335
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 335
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex
Fuel Vehicles ................................................. 335
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 335
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline...................... 336
Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 336
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 336
FLUID CAPACITIES ............................................ 337
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................. 337
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................ 338
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................339
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 339
Prepare A List ................................................ 339
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 339
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................339
FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 339
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center .............. 339
Mexico............................................................ 340
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............... 340
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired
(TDD/TTY) ...................................................... 340
Service Contract ........................................... 340
WARRANTY INFORMATION................................341
MOPAR® PARTS .................................................341
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................341
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C............................................ 341
In Canada ...................................................... 341
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................342
GENERAL INFORMATION....................................342
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Chrysler vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This
Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced.
For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Chrysler vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 101.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
These statements are against operating
procedures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 101
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 102
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 101
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 8
9
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 102
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 102
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 102
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 103
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 103
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 103
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 103
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 103
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 103
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 103
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 104
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 104
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 104
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 104
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 105
Red Warning Lights
1
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 9
10
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 105
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 105
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 105
Service Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) Warning Light
Ú page 105
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light
Ú page 105
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 106
Yellow Warning Lights
Yellow Indicator Lights
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Green Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 107
KeySense Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light
Ú page 107
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 107
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 10
12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and
Remote Start (if equipped). The key fob allows you
to lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, as well as
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob
become depleted. The emergency key is also for
locking/unlocking the glove compartment. You can
keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
The key fob LED light brightness is designed for
indoor light viewing, so the LED light may not be
visible in direct sunlight Ú page 342.
Key Fob
1 — LED Light
2 — Unlock
3 — Liftgate
4 — Left Power Sliding Side Door
5 — Emergency Key
6 — Lock
7 — Remote Start
8 — Right Power Sliding Side Door
9 — PANIC Alarm
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s front door and sliding
door or twice within five seconds to unlock all
doors and the liftgate. Push and release the lock
button on the key fob to lock all doors and the
liftgate.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will
flash and the illuminated entry system will be
activated. When the doors are locked, the turn
signals will flash and the horn will chirp. Settings in
the Uconnect system can change to lights only,
chirp only, or both.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors can be locked. The doors will
unlock again only if the key fob is inside the
passenger compartment.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
push of the unlock button within the Uconnect
system Ú page 148.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin
battery dimensions may not meet the original
OEM coin battery dimensions.
Batteries contain harmful chemicals. Dispose
old batteries by placing them in correct
containers according to the law or by taking
them to a dealership, where they will be handled
appropriately.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
for further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by pushing the
mechanical release button on the side of the
key fob with your thumb and then pulling the
key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Insert a coin or a flat blade screw driver into
the now exposed slot and carefully pry on both
sides to disengage the snaps. Gently remove
the back cover from the fob, being careful not
to damage any of the snaps.
3. Remove the battery by sliding the battery
rearward in its pocket until the battery lifts up.
Remove the depleted battery from the battery
pocket and dispose appropriately.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Fit a new CR2032 battery ensuring that the
positive (+) side is facing upwards. Push the
battery into the pocket until it is firmly seated
in place and secured under both tabs.
5. Align the back cover into its original position
and snap it back in place by pushing it against
the fob until it is seated all around.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
KeySense Features — If Equipped
This feature provides the vehicle owner with the
ability to customize vehicle settings that can be
applied to determine the driving experience for
other drivers of the vehicle. The vehicle settings
are protected by a unique 4-digit PIN, which the
vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific
settings for the first time.
KeySense also has additional features that are
always enabled when the specific key is in use that
cannot be set by the vehicle owner. While this
specific key fob is in use, the vehicle will respond
accordingly to the customized vehicle settings and
mandatory features.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
in just two hours and can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swal-
lowed or placed inside any part of the body,
seek immediate medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from chil-
dren. If the battery compartment does not
close securely, stop using the product and
keep it away from children.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ Ignition, always remember to place the
ignition in the OFF position.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
This includes enhanced driving assistance
features, increased driver alerts, and the locking of
certain optional features. Settings can be
customized within the Uconnect system
Ú page 148.
KeySense Key Fob
KeySense Unique Splash Screen
At start-up the KeySense splash screen should
inform the driver that the vehicle will be
functioning in KeySense mode when the KeySense
key is in use.
Start Up Display Features
Unique splash screen graphic
Telltale illuminated
After unique splash screen, and after stored
messages are cycled, then start-up KeySense
messages (Range & Max Speed) are displayed
The following features are always enabled when
this key is in use:
Entertainment audio muted if front row occu-
pied seat belts are not fastened
Consistent seat belt unfastened chime
Maximum radio volume limited to 15 out of 39
Daytime Running Lights
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains
on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
is used to start the engine but there is an issue
with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
and shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 342.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has four
operating positions; three of which are labeled and
will illuminate when in position. The three positions
are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is
START. During START, RUN will illuminate.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices
(e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power windows)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, etc.)
START
The engine will start
(when foot is on the brake pedal)
The engine only runs in the ON/RUN ignition
position or from a Remote Start request.
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a backup
method can be used to operate the ignition switch.
Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency
key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition
switch.
Backup Starting Method
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n
Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For the proper engine starting procedure, see
Ú page 110.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start the
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
The system has a range of 328 ft
(100 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in all
ambient conditions before the customer enters the
vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
reduce this range Ú page 342.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in
10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operations are
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be
repeated for a third cycle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation. Always remove
the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All of the following conditions must be met before
the engine will Remote Start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous Remote
Start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
sion
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not
illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, either push and release the unlock button
on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
START/STOP ignition button.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote Start
button on the key fob, or if the engine is allowed to
run for the entire 15 minute cycle. Once the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set
operations (temperature, blower control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
system will automatically activate front defrost for
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the
system will automatically adjust the settings
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next
section for detailed operation.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous and
can cause serious injury or death when
inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
of the Remote Start system, windows, door
locks or other controls could cause serious
injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
feature will also turn on if programmed in the
comfort menu screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 148. In warm weather, the driver vented
seat feature will automatically turn on when the
Remote Start is activated, if programmed via the
comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
climate control settings depending on the outside
ambient temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an
optimal temperature and mode, dependent upon
the outside ambient temperature. When the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume their previous
settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to
78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be based
on the last settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, and Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 60.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of
Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position. The climate control settings will
change, and exit automatic operation, if manually
adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in
Remote Start mode. This includes the OFF button
on the climate controls, which will turn the
system off.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When the Remote Start system is active and the
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F
(0.6°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate.
Exiting Remote Start will resume its previous
operation. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was
active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START CANCEL MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the alarm
is activated, the interior switches for door locks,
power sliding doors and power liftgate are
disabled. The Vehicle Security system provides
both audible and visible signals. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security system will
provide the following audible and visible signals:
the horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in
the instrument cluster will flash.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in
the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry, make sure
the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob
available in the same exterior zone
Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle (if equipped)
Ú page 22.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry, push the
keyless ignition START/STOP ignition button
(requires at least one valid key fob in the
vehicle).
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the liftgate
button will not disarm the Vehicle Security
system. If someone enters the vehicle through
the liftgate and opens any door, the alarm will
sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
interior power door lock switches will not unlock
the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
of the previously described arming sequences has
occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward. To unlock the front
doors, pull the inside door handle to the first detent
or rotate the door lock button until the ribbing is
visible. To unlock the rear doors, rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible.
Manual Front Door Lock Location
Manual Door Lock Knob
Manual Rear Door Lock Location
If the door lock button is locked (no ribbing is
visible) when you shut the door, the door will lock.
Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock the
liftgate.
1 — Manual Door Lock
2 — Door Handle
1 — Door Handle
2 — Manual Door Lock
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the event
of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Driver Power Door Lock Switches
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking your
keys in the vehicle. Placing the ignition in the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position and a door is open, as a
reminder to place the ignition in the OFF position
and remove the key fob.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a
feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob
lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through the Uconnect system Ú page 148.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
passive entry system if it is located next to a
mobile phone, laptop, or other electronic device;
these devices may block the key fob’s wireless
signal and prevent the passive entry handle
from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
If set by the customer in the Uconnect Settings,
unlocking with Passive Entry will initiate illumi-
nated approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for the time 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry also initiates
two flashes of the turn lamps.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been
raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and will arm the security
system (if equipped).
The sliding side doors can be unlocked from the
outside using the Passive Entry system.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in
the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side:
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door
handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the
driver’s side doors (driver/sliding door)
automatically. Grabbing the front passenger door
handle will unlock all four doors and the liftgate
automatically. The interior door panel lock knob
will rotate when the door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock
when you grab hold of the front driver’s door
handle, depending on the selected setting in the
Uconnect system Ú page 148.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive
Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid key fob while a
door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch
while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all open
doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be
executed. If it detects a key fob inside the car, and
it does not detect any key fob outside the car, then
the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid key fob is detected outside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are met:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the doors
are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
NOTE:
On the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the key
fob can be locked in the vehicle.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
With a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, cycle the handle to open the liftgate and
pull the liftgate open.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, push the door handle lock button to lock all
four doors and the liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must
wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door
handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
without the vehicle unlocking.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the
key fob lock button, or the lock button located on
the vehicle’s interior door panel Ú page 342.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature
unlocks all of the vehicle doors when any door is
opened. This will occur only after the gear selector
has been placed into the PARK position, after the
vehicle has been driven (the gear selector has
been placed out of PARK and all doors closed).
The Unlock Doors Automatically On Exit feature will
not operate if there is any manual operation of the
door locks (lock or unlock).
This feature can be turned on or off in the
Uconnect system Ú page 148.
MANUAL SLIDING SIDE DOOR
The sliding door may be opened from the inside or
the outside. Pull outward on the exterior handle to
open the sliding door. The sliding door inside
handle functions by rocking forward and back.
Rocking the handle backwards opens the door and
rocking forward releases the hold open latch in
order to close the door.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Side Door Handle And Lock Functions
To keep your door operating properly, observe the
following guidelines:
Always open the door smoothly.
Avoid high impacts against the door stop when
opening the door. This is very important when
your vehicle is parked on an incline as the door
will slide faster in the downhill direction.
There is a hold-open latch that is activated when
the sliding door is fully opened. This latch will
keep your sliding door open on any incline. To
close the sliding door after the hold-open latch
is activated, you must rock the inside handle
forward or pull outward on the exterior handle.
Always make sure that the sliding door is fully
latched anytime the vehicle is in motion.
NOTE:
The left side sliding door cannot be opened while
the fuel door is open.
POWER SLIDING SIDE DOOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power sliding door may be power opened or
closed in several ways:
Key fob
Inside or outside handles
Buttons located:
In the overhead console
Just inside the sliding door
On the outside handle
Push the button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open, close, or
reverse a power sliding door.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the door when the door is locked. All other
ways require the sliding door to be unlocked. If the
vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, pressing
the button on the outside handle will unlock and
open the sliding door, with a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the door handle.
Overhead Console Power Switches
1 — Door Handle
2 — Door Lock
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
There are power sliding side door switches located
on the B-pillar trim panel, just in front of the power
sliding door for the rear seat passengers.
To operate the sliding door manually with the
handles or to avoid unintentional operation of the
power sliding doors from the rear seats, push the
power sliding door power off button, located in the
overhead console, to remove power to the handles
and buttons just inside the sliding doors. The
power off LED, in the overhead console, will be lit
when the handles are manual. When the LED is lit,
pushing the power sliding door power off button
will return the handles to power operation.
NOTE:
If anything obstructs the power sliding side door
while it is closing or opening, the door will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open position
and an audible tone will sound, provided it
meets sufficient resistance. The turn signals will
flash with sliding door movements.
If the power sliding door stops in the middle due
to obstacles, it will power open on the next
command.
Driver Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
Passenger Side Power Sliding Side Door Switch
CHILD PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small children
riding in the rear seats, the sliding doors are
equipped with a Child Protection Door Lock
system.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur if
caught in the path of the sliding door. Make
sure the door path is clear before closing the
door.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a sliding door or door open
message or warning indicator. Failure to do
this could result in unintentionally leaving the
sliding door open while driving.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Engage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. On the rear of the sliding door, slide the Child
Protection Door Lock control inward (toward
the vehicle) to engage the Child Protection
Door Lock.
Child Protection Door Locks
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock,
always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child
Protection Door Lock is in the locked position.
After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock, always test the inside door handle with the
sliding door closed to make certain the Child
Protection Door Lock is in the unlocked position.
The inside door handle will not open the sliding
door when the Child Protection Door Lock is
engaged.
The power sliding door will operate from the
switch located just inside the sliding door,
regardless of the Child Protection Door Lock
lever position.
To avoid unintentional operation of the power
sliding door from the rear seats, push the
Sliding Door Power Off button, located in the
overhead console. When the overhead console
power OFF LED is lit, the sliding door may not be
power opened or closed by pushing the buttons
just inside the sliding doors or pulling on the
handles.
To Disengage The Child Protection Door Lock
1. Open the sliding side door.
2. Slide the Child Protection Door Lock control
outward (away from the vehicle) to disengage
the Child Protection Door Lock.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite
sliding door.
NOTE:
After disengaging (or engaging) the Child
Protection Door Lock, always test the inside door
handle with the sliding door closed to make certain
the Child Protection Door Lock is in the desired
position. The inside door handle will open the
sliding door when the Child Protection Door Lock is
disengaged.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the sliding doors
cannot be opened from the inside door handle
when the Child Protection Door Locks are
engaged.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column.
The tilt/telescoping lever is located left of the
steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The
heated steering wheel has only one temperature
setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been
turned on, it will operate for an average of
80 minutes or more before automatically shutting
off. This timing may vary depending on the
temperature of the environment. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system.
Press the heated steering wheel button once
to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or
driving with the steering column unlocked, could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical
conditions must exercise care when using the
steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system
of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
(F
RONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Manual Front Adjuster
Both front seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjustment Handle
2 — Height Adjustment
3 — Recline Lever
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered
by using a lever, located on the outboard side of
the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat
height or pump the lever downward to lower the
seat height.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
For models equipped with manual seats, the
recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
Manual Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever and
push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure the seatback has latched.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Manual Forward/Rearward Adjustment —
Quad Seats (If Equipped)
Both second row seats are adjustable forward or
rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is
located under the seat cushion at the front edge of
each seat.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
is parked.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Manual Rear Seat Adjuster
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and
slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar
once you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward
on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Manual Recline — Quad Seats
Recline Lever
To recline, lean forward slightly, lift the lever, and
push back to the desired position and release the
lever. Lean forward and lift the lever to return the
seatback to its normal position. Using body
pressure, lean forward and rearward on the seat to
be sure the seatback has latched.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped
The second row bench seat can accommodate two
passengers, while providing easy access to the
third row seats without any folding of the second
row seats.
To recline the seatback, lean forward slightly, lift
the recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat cushion, and push back to the desired
position and release the lever. Lean forward and
lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal
position. Using body pressure, lean forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure the seatback has
latched.
Recline Lever
The bench seat does not stow in the floor, but is
removable for added cargo space.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Bench Seat
1. Adjust the driver and passenger seats
forward to allow room for the bench seat
removal.
2. Raise the armrest completely, then lift the
recline lever located on the outboard side of
the seat to fold the seatback flat against the
seat cushion.
Folded Position
3. Pull the release strap located behind the seat,
in the center near the floor to release the
latches.
Release Strap Location
4. Once the latches are released, tilt the entire
seat toward the front of the vehicle. The seat
can now be removed through either sliding
side door, or through the liftgate.
Tilt Bench Seat Forward
NOTE:
Due to the weight of the bench seat, it is recom-
mended that two people are utilized for its
removal.
When storing the removed bench seat, it is
important to keep the seatback in the folded
position.
Reinstalling The Bench Seat
1. To reinstall the bench seat, align the seats
front attachments into the detent positions
on the floor.
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seatback into its
original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seatback
to the seating position.
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Second Row Removable 8th Seat —
If Equipped
While the 8th seat does not stow in the floor, it is
foldable and removable for added cargo space.
Second Row 8th Seat Fold Flat Strap
The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor. To remove the seat, pull the
release strap to release the rear latches. The seat
assembly can now be removed from the vehicle by
moving it in a rearward direction from the detent
positions in the floor.
Release Strap
NOTE:
Seat can be removed easier with one outboard
seat stowed in the load floor.
To reinstall the seat, align the seat into the detent
positions on the floor. Tilt seat rearward to lock the
seatback into its original position.
In Floor Detent Guides
Fold-Flat — Quad Seats
To fold the seat, lift the recliner lever to the full
upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The seatback may lock into the fold-flat position.
Use the recline lever to unlock the seatback.
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating: when
returning the seat to the original position, the
headrest must be folded back to the original
position.
Stow ‘n Go Seating Head Restraint
Easy Entry
Easy Tilt Seat — With Or Without Child Seat
Installed
The second row seats can be tilted forward for easy
entry into the third row with or without a child seat
installed.
1. Located in the seatback of the second row
seat is a lever (or handle for Stow ‘n Go seats)
that provides easier access to the third row by
tilting the seat forward.
2. Slide the lever upwards, or if equipped, pull the
handle forward, to unlock the seatback.
Lift Easy Tilt Seat Lever (If Equipped)
Pull Easy Tilt Seat Handle (If Equipped)
3. Push on seatback to slide seat forward to
access the third row.
Easy Tilt Seat
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Easy Tilt With Child Seat Installed
4. To put the seat back into original position, just
pull back on the seatback and lock the seat
into position.
Easy Entry — With The Seat Folded Flat
The seats can be folded and tilted for more
accessibility for passengers to enter and exit the
third row.
1. Without a child seat installed, you can fold the
seat by pulling the recliner handle on the
bottom part of the seat. Before pulling the
recliner lever, make sure the arm rests are
folded up.
Recliner Lever
2. To put it back into position, pull back on the
folded seat and make sure that it locks into
position. Then, pull the seatback toward the
back and fold down the arm rests.
Exit For Third Row Passengers — Stow ‘n Go Seats
Only
If the second row is equipped with Stow ‘n Go, third
row passengers can pull the strap and push the
seat forward to fold the seatback down and tilt the
seat to the floor for an easy exit.
Pull Strap For Third Row Passengers
NOTE:
This process is for when there is no child seat
installed. Use the easy entry lever if a child seat is
installed.
WARNING!
Do not use this feature with a child in seat.
Serious injury or death may occur.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Removable Quad Seat
The second row quad seats, not equipped with the
Stow ‘n Go feature, are removable for added cargo
space.
Removing Seat
1. Adjust seat to the full rearward position.
2. Lift the recline lever to fold the seatback flat
against the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat Recline Lever
NOTE:
Push downward on the seatback to make sure it is
in the locked position.
3. The release strap is located on the front of the
seat, near the floor.
Seat Release Strap
4. To remove the seat, pull the release strap to
release the rear latches.
5. Tilt the back of the seat to the upward position.
Tilt Seat Forward
6. The seat assembly can now be removed from
the vehicle. Grab the front seatback edge
located near the head restraint and the grab
the bar on the rear side of the seat cushion for
easy removal.
Seat Removal
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Reinstalling Seat
1. To reinstall the seat: With the seat tilted
forward, align the seat’s front attachments
into the detent positions on the floor.
In Floor Seat Detents
Installing Seat
2. Tilt seat rearward to lock the seat back into its
original position.
NOTE:
Push downward to ensure the rear latches are in
the locked position.
3. Lift the recline handle and return the seat back
to the seating position.
Manually Folding Third Row Seats —
If Equipped
1. Lower the center head restraint down to the
seatback by pushing the button on the guide
and pushing the head restraint down.
2. Pull release strap marked “1” to release the
anchors.
Release Strap “1”
WARNING!
If not properly latched, the seat could become
loose. Personal injuries could result.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull release strap marked “2” and tumble the
seat rearward into the storage bin.
Release Strap “2”
Stowed Third Row Seat
To Unfold Third Row Seats
1. Pull up on the assist strap to lift the seat out
of the storage bin and push the seat forward
until the anchors latch.
Assist Straps
2. Pulling strap “2” releases the seatback to
return to its full upright position.
Strap “2”
3. Raise the head restraint to its upright position.
Stow 'n Go Seating
On vehicles equipped with Stow 'n Go seating, the
second and third row seats can be folded into the
floor for convenient storage.
SECOND ROW STOW 'N GO
To stow the seat in the floor, move the front seat all
the way forward using the manual seat adjustment
bar. Move the seatback all the way forward using
the recliner handle located on the outboard side of
the cushion. Move the seat height to at least mid
position using the height adjuster handle in the
outboard side of the cushion.
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always be
sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
head restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor
mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the
locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked posi-
tion.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
For information on storage bin function with
the seats rearward Ú page 75.
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat
to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the
front seats while folding the top half down and
rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Remove the plastic storage bin from the
storage area, and store in a safe location.
5. Fold the armrest upward and stow the seat by
grabbing the strap on the lower part of the
seatback, and guide the seat into the storage
area.
Pull Strap
6. Push down on the seatback to lock the seat
into the storage area.
Push To Lock
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Close the floor by pulling the floor panel
backwards by the bottom corner edge of the
panel.
Extend Floor Panel
8. Push down on floor panel to lock into place.
Push To Lock
9. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
TO UNSTOW SECOND ROW SEATS
To unstow the seat from the floor, move the front
seat all the way forward using the manual seat
adjustment bar.
1. To access the storage area, remove the floor
mat (if equipped) and place the lock rod in the
locked position.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched:
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must be latched and flat
to avoid damage from contact with the front
seat tracks, which have minimal clearance to
the cover.
Do not sit on the second row seat when it is in
the stowed position with the seatback upright
otherwise damage to the seat may occur.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat
to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
3. Pull the floor panel and position it toward the
front seats while folding the top half down and
rest it against the front seats.
Push Panel Forward
4. Pull the strap located on the seat and pull the
seat out of the storage area. Push the seat
rearward making sure that it locks into the
floor. Fold the seatback into the upright
position and pull the headrest up.
NOTE:
If the seatback is locked, it will be necessary to use
the recliner handle to unlock the back before
folding into the upright position.
Pull Strap
5. Replace the plastic storage bin into the
storage area.
6. To position the floor panel back into its original
state, grab the bottom corner and extend it
outward.
Extend Panel
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
7. Lay the floor panel flat and push down until it
clicks into position.
Push Down To Lock
8. Readjust the front seat as needed, and
replace the floor mat (if equipped).
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way
power seat for the driver. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. The
switches control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Driver Power Seat Switches
WARNING!
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always be
sure the seats are fully latched.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision. Always make sure the
head restraints are in their upright positions
when the seat is to be occupied.
1 — Seat Switch
2 — Seatback Switch
3 — Lumbar Switch
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward by using the seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in
two directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The front driver’s seat may be equipped with a
four-way lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the
equipped power seat. Push the switch forward or
rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support. Push the switch upward or downward to
raise or lower the lumbar support.
The front passenger’s seat may be equipped with
a two-way lumbar adjustment. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the
equipped power seat. Push the switch forward or
rearward to increase or decrease the lumbar
support.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
result in loss of control which could cause a
collision and serious injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
Serious injury or death could result from a
poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches
(60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is
greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to
its previously set position when the ignition is
cycled out of the OFF position.
When the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
the driver seat will move to a position 0.3 inches
(7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver
seat position is between 0.9 – 2.7 inches (22.7
– 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
will return to its previously set position when the
ignition is cycled out of the OFF position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop.
At this position, there is no benefit to the driver
by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature can be enabled or
disabled through the programmable features in
the instrument cluster display Ú page 92.
HEATED SEATS
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located
in the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or off heat settings.
The indicator lights in each switch indicate the
level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will
illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for off.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time
to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to
turn the heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication,
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical
condition must exercise care when using the
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-
heated could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the seat.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
ADJUSTABLE ARMREST
(F
RONT SEATS) — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with adjustable
armrests on the front seats. The armrest can be
adjusted up or down.
To adjust the armrest height, push and hold the
button while moving the armrest to the desired
position. Release the button to lock the armrest
into place.
Adjustable Armrest
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
injury by restricting head movement in the event of
a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
so that the top of the head restraint is located
above the top of your ear.
Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped
with four-way head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward. The front
head restraints are also adjustable forward and
rearward. To tilt forward, pull the top of the head
restraint toward the front of the vehicle to the
desired position. To adjust the head restraint
rearward, continue pulling forward on the top of
the head restraint to the furthest forward position
and the head restraint will return to the upright
position.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
Normal Position
Forward Adjustment
Head Restraints — Second Row Quad
Seats
The second row outboard head restraints, as well
as the removable 8th passenger seat (if equipped),
may have adjustable head restraints.
NOTE:
If equipped with Stow ‘n Go seating, the head
restraints are non-adjustable and non-removable.
Do not pull on non-adjustable head restraints
when folding the seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench
The second row bench seat is equipped with
adjustable head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push
the adjustment button, located at the base of the
head restraint, and push downward.
Bench Seat Head Restraint
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. Seatback angle may
need to be adjusted to fully remove the head
restraint. To reinstall the head restraint, put the
head restraint posts into the holes and push
downward. Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
For information on child restraint tethering, see
Ú page 211.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head restraints
in a location outside the occupant compart-
ment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above
prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a
seat.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints — Third Row
The outboard head restraints can be manually
folded forward for improved rearward visibility. Pull
the release strap to fold them forward.
Release Straps
NOTE:
The head restraints must be raised manually
when occupying the third row.
Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
third row seats.
The head restraint in the center position can be
raised and lowered for tether routing or height
adjustment Ú page 211.
NOTE:
To remove the center head restraint, raise it as far
as it can go. Then, push the release button and the
adjustment button at the base of each post while
pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head
restraint, put the head restraint posts into the
holes and push downward. Then, using the
adjustment button, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Commands and tips you need to know to control
your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in
the vehicle to properly protect the occupants.
Follow the reinstallation instructions above prior
to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate/deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise
that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first push
the VR button, wait until after the beep, then say
your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a
Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 342.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
or visit
DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is used to allow the driver
to adjust up, down and left, right. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Start A Phone
Call, Begin Radio, Media, And Climate Functions,
Or Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Voice Recog-
nition Button To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation,
Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone Call, And Send
Or Receive A Text
2 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Not Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone
Button To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
feature on or off by pushing the button at the base
of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will
illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is
activated. The sensor to the right of the button
does not illuminate.
NOTE:
This feature is disabled when the vehicle is in
REVERSE. If your vehicle is not equipped with an
on/off button on the mirror, the mirror will default
to on and can be turned on/off through the touch-
screen.
Automatic Dimming Button
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the cover.
Illuminated Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center
of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the
optimal view.
CONVERSATION MIRROR
Located in the overhead console there is a
conversation mirror to view all the passengers in
the vehicle. Push the panel to release the drop
down mirror. Raise the mirror and push to latch it
back in the stowed position.
Conversation Mirror
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select
buttons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R
(right) to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE:
A light in the selected button will illuminate indi-
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on side
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror.
1 — Left Mirror Select
2 — Right Mirror Select
3 — Mirror Control Switch
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
OUTSIDE MIRRORS FOLDING FEATURE
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The
hinges have three detent positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
buttons will activate the devices they are
programmed to with each press of the corre-
sponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above
the center button Ú page 342.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device that is being
programmed to the HomeLink® system. Make
sure your hand-held transmitter is programmed to
activate the device you are trying to program your
HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the
garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels
of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first
time.
If you require assistance, please call toll-free
1-800-355-3515 or visit
HomeLink.com.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition into the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed
when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
Do not erase channels when programming addi-
tional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the
antenna is attached to the device. The button may
not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary
slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button
you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not
have a rolling code. These devices will also not
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, follow the
steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels
when programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program, while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold the
garage door opener transmitter button you are
trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink
®indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly. Once this happens, release both
buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
code final step 2, after completing rolling code
final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays
on constantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
confirm that the garage door opener motor
operates. If the garage door opener motor
does not operate, repeat the steps from the
beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage
Door Opener” for the procedure on how to program
HomeLink® to a miscellaneous device, as it
follows the same procedure. Be sure to determine
if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling code
before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
US gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner. The procedure may need to be
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has
been previously trained, without erasing all the
channels, follow the procedure below. Be sure to
determine whether the new device you want to
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the HomeLink® Indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the
button.
3.
Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United
States that require the transmitter signals to
“time-out” after several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds
of transmission – which may not be long enough
for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the
same manner.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if
people or pets are in the path of the door or
gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains
carbon monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
colorless. Carbon monoxide is poisonous
when inhaled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter every two seconds
until HomeLink® has successfully accepted
the frequency signal. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change
flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or
longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you are programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
for programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
until the indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of
the steering column. The multifunction lever
controls the turn signals, headlight high/low
beams, and flash-to-pass functions.
Multifunction Lever
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. The switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, interior lights and the fog
lights.
Headlight Switch
From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the first detent for parking light
and instrument panel light operation. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel
operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The headlights or LED light bars on your vehicle will
illuminate when the engine is started. This
provides a constant lights on condition until the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. If the parking
brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRLs) will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
nect system Ú page 148.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side
of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
the hazard warning lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
Pulling the multifunction lever back will turn the
low beams on.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns your headlights on
or off based on ambient light levels. To turn the
system on, turn the headlight switch to the extreme
clockwise position aligning the indicator with the
AUTO on the headlight switch. When the system is
on, the Headlight Time Delay feature is also on.
This means your headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. To turn the Automatic System off, turn the
headlight switch counterclockwise to the O (off)
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the Automatic mode.
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Control
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds after exiting your
vehicle.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in
the OFF position while the headlights are still on.
The 90 second delay interval begins when
headlight switch is turned off. If the headlights or
parking lights are turned back on or the ignition is
placed in the ON position, the delay will be
cancelled.
When exiting the vehicle the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 30, 60, or
90 seconds or not remain on. You can change the
timer setting through the Uconnect system
Ú page 148.
If the headlights are turned off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The headlights must be turned off within 45
seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF position
to activate this feature.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or the parking lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the
vehicle will chime when the driver's door is opened.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch control knob. Pushing the
headlight switch control knob a second time will
turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each side
of the instrument cluster flash to show proper
operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective
outside light bulb.
Turn Signal Warning
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled for about 1 mile (1.6 km) with the turn
signals on, a chime will sound and a message will
display in the cluster to alert the driver.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
BATTERY PROTECTION
This feature provides battery protection to avoid
wearing down the battery if the headlights or
parking lights are left on for extended periods of
time when the ignition is in the OFF position. After
eight minutes of the ignition being in the OFF
position and the headlight switch in any position
other than OFF or AUTO, the lights will turn off
automatically until the next cycle of the ignition or
headlight switch.
The battery protection feature will be disabled if
the ignition is placed in any position other than
OFF during the eight minute delay.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy light switches are used to turn the
courtesy lights on/off.
Courtesy Light Switches
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the
driver or passenger light switch.
NOTE:
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent the
battery from discharging once the doors are
closed.
If a light is left on, it will automatically be turned
off approximately 10 minutes after the ignition
is in the OFF position.
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights —
If Equipped
Located above the rear passengers are courtesy/
reading lights. The lights turn on when a front door,
a sliding door or the liftgate is opened. If your
vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) the lights will also turn on when the unlock
button on the key fob is pushed.
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights.
Push the lens to turn these lights on while inside
the vehicle. Push the lens a second time to turn
each light off.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the ambient light located in the door handle
lights, under instrument panel lights, door map
pocket lights, and cubby bin lights.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
Interior Lighting Off
Rotate the dimmer control on the right to the off
position (extreme bottom). The interior lights will
remain off when the doors or liftgate are open.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of the
headlight switch, and is located on the driver’s side
of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate the
instrument panel dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the brightness
of the instrument panel. At the top detent of the
instrument panel dimmer, all the interior lights will
also illuminate.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
At the bottom most setting (extreme bottom)
interior lights are turned off (dome off), and the
cluster, radio and instrument lighting go to their
lowest dimmable setting.
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control
upward to the first detent. This feature brightens
all text displays such as the odometer, instrument
cluster display, and radio when the position lights
or headlights are on.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located
on the right side of the steering column. The front
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
Washer And Wiper Controls
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end
of the lever upward, to the first detent past the
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation. To turn the
windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the
lever all the way down to OFF.
Washer And Wiper Controls
NOTE:
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper switch is turned
off and the blades cannot return to the off position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
warm the windshield with the defroster before
and during windshield washer use.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wipers
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate
the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first
detent position, and then turn the switch at the end
of the lever to select the desired delay interval.
There are four delay settings, which allow you to
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one
cycle every second to a maximum of approximately
36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals
will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward
you and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and
operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled
while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
will operate several cycles, then turn off.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the windshield. The wash function must be used in
order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 292.
REAR WIPER AND WASHER
Rear Window Wiper Operation
Rotate the windshield wiper lever center ring
upwards to operate one of two modes for the rear
window wiper:
First detent — intermittent mode.
Second detent — continuous mode.
Rear Window Washer Operation
Pushing the windshield wiper lever forward
activates the rear window washer. If the lever is
pushed while on the intermittent setting, the
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe
cycles after the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off
position, the wipers will operate several wipe
cycles, then turn off.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on
the touchscreen to change the current
setting to the coldest output of air.
The MAX A/C indicator illuminates when
MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
A/C Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
If the system is in Mix or Defrost mode, the A/C
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If not operating in AUTO mode, the system will
not automatically sense the presence of fog,
mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost Mode
must be manually selected to clear the wind-
shield and side glass.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode and adjust blower
speed if needed.
Recirculation Button
Press and release the Recirculation
button on the touchscreen, or push the
button on the faceplate to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air. The Recirculation indicator and the
A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation
button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode if not recommended.
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press
the AUTO button on the touchscreen, or
push the button on the faceplate. AUTO
will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the blower
speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly
recommended for efficiency. You can turn AUTO on
in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touch-
screen
Push the button on the faceplate
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual mode and automatic
mode Ú page 72.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push the
button on the faceplate to change the
current airflow setting to Defrost mode.
The indicator illuminates when this feature is on.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch
into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is
turned off the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost
button on the touchscreen, or push the
button on the faceplate to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after 15 minutes.
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 5 radio,
the temperature can be adjusted by pressing the
Temperature readout on the top left and right
corners of the status bar.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front and rear passenger
temperature settings with the driver temperature
settings. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of
air forced through the climate control
system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation.
The speeds can be selected using either the
blower control knob on the faceplate or the
buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you
turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
speed can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the
knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of
the Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to turn the Climate Control ON/
OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front ATC Panel—If Equipped
The Three-Zone Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front ATC panel.
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to display the rear climate controls.
The control functions now operate the rear
system.
Press the "Front Climate" button on the touch-
screen to return to the front climate controls.
Uconnect 4 Front ATC Panel Rear Control Display
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release the Rear Climate
button to access the rear climate
controls. The indicator will illuminate
when the rear climate controls are on.
REAR AUTO BUTTON
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen to change the current
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This
feature automatically controls the rear interior
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution
and amount. Toggling this function will cause the
rear system to switch between manual mode and
automatic modes. Ú page 72.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls
from adjusting the rear temperature and
blower settings.
NOTE:
The Rear Lock button is only available on the
touchscreen.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release this button to change
the display on the Uconnect system back
to the Front Climate Controls.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the front occupants with the
ability to control the rear temperature.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature will move up and down with the
driver’s temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front and rear passenger
temperature settings with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature/mode/blower settings while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using the
buttons on the touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release this button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped
The rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
system has floor air outlets underneath the
passengers’ seats, and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system
provides heated air through the floor outlets or
cool, dehumidified air through the headliner
outlets.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the
rear ATC control when the Rear Temperature Lock
button is turned off.
The rear ATC system is located in the headliner, on
the passenger side of the vehicle.
Rear Automatic Climate Controls
1. Adjust the rear blower, rear temperature and
the rear modes to suit your comfort needs.
2. ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
ATC System will automatically achieve and
maintain that comfort level. When the system is
set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to
change the settings. You will experience the
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings. The system automatically adjusts the
temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
AUTO BUTTON
The AUTO button automatically controls
the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Performing this function will
cause the system to switch between manual mode
and automatic modes Ú page 72.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear of
the vehicle, push temperature control up
button to raise the temperature. The rear
temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
To change the temperature in the rear of
the vehicle, push temperature control
down button to lower the temperature.
The rear temperature settings are
displayed in control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually
set to off, or any fixed blower speed by
pushing the blower control buttons. This
allows the rear seat occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases
blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons
decreases the blower speed.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Manual Temperature
Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on.
Performing this function again will cause
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button to
change the current setting. The indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in
Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side
glass, select Defrost mode, and increase blower
speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator),
for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with
a gentle water spray from the front of the radi-
ator and through the condenser.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change
the system between recirculation mode
and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions
such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes
except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed
out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C (Air
Conditioning) can be deselected manually without
disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the
inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing
operation. Recirculation is disabled automatically
if this mode is selected. Attempting to use
Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink, and then turn off.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost
button to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator
illuminates when this feature is on.
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting
and defogging. Performing this function will cause
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) to switch
into manual mode. If the Front Defrost mode is
turned off the climate system will return the
previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost
Control button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after
15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Temperature Control
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red arrow
button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue arrow
button on the touchscreen for cooler
temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front and rear passenger
temperature settings with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature. Pressing SYNC on
the touchscreen while in the Front Climate screen
synchronizes the driver and passenger
temperatures only. In order to SYNC rear
temperature to driver temperature, the
touchscreen must be on the Rear Climate screen.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you
turn the blower control knob clockwise from the
lowest blower setting. The blower speed
decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to
reduce the blower setting and the large blower
icon to increase the blower setting. Blower
speed can also be selected by pressing the
blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Faceplate: Push the button in the center of the
knob to change the airflow distribution mode.
Touchscreen: Select Mode by pressing one of the
Mode Buttons on the touchscreen.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these outlets
can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. The air vanes of the center
outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost,
and side window demister outlets. This
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
Controlling The Rear Climate Controls
From The Front MTC Display/Touchscreen
The Three-Zone Manual Temperature Control
(MTC) system allows for adjustment of the rear
climate controls from the front MTC display/
touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 Front MTC Panel Rear Control Display
To change the rear system settings:
Press the "Rear Climate" button on the touch-
screen to change control to rear control mode;
rear display appears. Control functions now
operate rear system.
To return to the Front screen on the Uconnect
system, press the "Front Climate" button on the
touchscreen.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL BUTTON
Press and release this button to access
the rear climate controls. The indicator
will illuminate when the rear climate
controls are on.
REAR LOCK BUTTON
Press and release this button to lock out
the rear manual temperature controls
from adjusting the rear temperature and
blower settings.
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON
Press and release this button to change
the display on the Uconnect system back
to the Front Climate Controls.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
These buttons provide the rear passengers with
independent temperature control.
Push the up arrow button on the
touchscreen to increase the
temperature.
Push the down arrow button on the
touchscreen to decrease the
temperature.
NOTE:
When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s
temperature moves up and down with the driver’s
temperature.
SYNC BUTTON
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. SYNC is
used to synchronize the front and rear passenger
temperature settings with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the front or rear passenger
temperature setting while in SYNC exits this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touch-
screen.
BLOWER CONTROL
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the Climate
Control system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower
causes automatic mode to switch to manual
operation. The speeds can be selected using the
buttons on the touchscreen.
PANEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Panel
Mode. In Panel Mode, air comes from the
outlets in the headliner. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the
flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut-off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to
Bi-Level Mode. In Bi-Level Mode, air
comes from the headliner outlets and
floor outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level Mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Press this button on the touchscreen to
change the air distribution mode to Floor
Mode. In Floor Mode, air comes from the
floor outlets.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROL OFF
BUTTON
Press and release this button to turn the
Rear Climate Controls off.
Rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
The rear Manual Temperature Control (MTC)
system has floor air outlets at the rear right side of
the third row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system
provides heated air through the floor outlets or
cool, dehumidified air through the headliner
outlets.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
The rear system temperature control buttons are
located on the headliner on the passenger side of
the vehicle.
Rear Manual Climate Controls
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL
To change the temperature in the rear of
the vehicle, push temperature control up
button to raise the temperature. The rear
temperature settings are displayed in
control head.
To change the temperature in the rear of
the vehicle, push temperature control
down button to lower the temperature.
The rear temperature settings are
displayed in control head.
REAR BLOWER CONTROL
The rear blower control can be manually
set to off, or any fixed blower speed by
pushing the blower control buttons. This
allows the rear seat occupants to control
the volume of air circulated in the rear of the
vehicle. The larger of the two icons increases
blower speed, whereas the smaller of the two icons
decreases the blower speed.
REAR MODE CONTROL
Push this button on the Rear Climate
Controls to change the air distribution
mode for the rear passengers.
PANEL MODE
Air comes from the outlets in the
headliner. Each of these outlets can be
individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
one side will shut off the airflow.
BI-LEVEL MODE
Air comes from both the headliner outlets
and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
FLOOR MODE
Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR CLIMATE CONTROL/BLOWER OFF
To manually set the rear blower
controls to off, press the Rear Climate
Control/Blower Off button.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Temperature Control system through an intake
grille, located in the floor under the passengers’
seats. Do not block or place objects directly in
front of the inlet grille or heater outlets. The
electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC) — I
F EQUIPPED
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the driver
and passenger temperature control buttons.
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
system will achieve and automatically
maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature, mode,
and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or
Metric units by selecting the U.S./Metric
customer-programmable feature within the
Uconnect system Ú page 148.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the blower
fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
The blower will increase in speed and transition
into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) display will
be turned off when the system is being used in the
manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving
ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the
beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with
a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine
overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) is recommended Ú page 337.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used
Ú page 337. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended,
because it may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control
system when the vehicle is being stored for an
extended period of time, see Ú page 330.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C (Air Conditioning)
for long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
the windshield, is free of obstructions such as
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Release Handle
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode),
(A/C) on, and blower
on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute
to flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control to
(Panel Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode) and
turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Door Storage
Both interior front door panels have multiple
pockets for storage.
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a
compartment is provided for the storage of one
pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the intention to
open the compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door Latch
The door will slowly rotate to the full open position.
Full Open Position
Instrument Panel Drawer
There is a storage drawer located in the lower
center of the instrument panel. It can be released
by pushing the access button above it. The drawer
is actuator assisted once the access button is
pushed. Pull drawer outward to the fully open
position.
Drawer Access Button
WARNING!
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed,
burning the occupants. Be careful when closing
the doors to avoid injury.
CAUTION!
The storage drawer must be closed while driving.
If left open during a collision, additional damage
may occur to property or the drawer mechanism.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Front Seatback Storage — If Equipped
The front seatbacks have a storage pocket on
some models.
Front Seatback Storage
Umbrella Holder
An umbrella holder has been conveniently molded
into the front door entry scuff moldings.
Umbrella Holder
Second Row Floor Storage Bins
There are removable storage bins (if equipped)
located in the areas below the load floor, located in
front of the second row seats.
In Floor Storage Bin
1. To access the storage bins with front seats in
the rearward position, place the lock rod in
the unlocked position so the load floor can
fold upwards towards the seatback.
Lock Rod
NOTE:
Push the lock rod inward for the locked
position.
Pull outward on the lock rod for the
unlocked position.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
2. Pull the latch located near the second row seat
to open the floor panel.
Floor Latch
Storage Bin Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and
latched while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance
to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the
open position, front seat adjustment may
damage the cover.
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the
second row seat storage bins. Once in the
storage bin, young children may not be able to
escape. If trapped in the storage bin, children
can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
In a collision, serious injury could result if the
seat storage bin covers are not properly
latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open. Keep the storage bin covers
closed and latched while the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not operate the storage bin covers while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
CAUTION!
The storage bin cover must lay flat and be
latched to avoid damage from contact with the
front seat tracks, which have minimal clearance
to the cover. If the storage bin cover is left in the
open position, front seat adjustment may
damage the cover.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Seat Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release Lever
As a security measure, the Seat Storage Bin Cover
has an Emergency Release Lever built into the
latching mechanism.
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
NOTE:
In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be
opened from inside of the bin by pushing on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the storage bin
cover latching mechanism.
Coat Hooks — If Equipped
Coat hooks are located along the headliner for the
second and third row seating positions. The coat
hook load limit is 10 lb (4.5 kg). Exceeding the
recommended load limit can cause the coat hooks
to break or disengage from the vehicle.
Coat Hook
SUN SCREENS — IF EQUIPPED
Sun screens are available for second row seating
windows. The screens store in the sill trim panels,
and the tops of the windows are equipped with
hooks that the sun screens attach to when
pulled out.
Sun Screen Retracted
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
near the top of the window.
Once the screen is completely to the top of the
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over
the two hooks attached to the top of the window.
Sun Screen Extended
To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward
to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back
into the base sill.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB/AUX CONTROL
There are numerous USB ports located throughout
the vehicle that allow an external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port. There are four total USB
ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard
USBs (Type A). There is also an AUX port located
between the USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped Ú page 189.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time. A pop-up will appear and allow you to select
the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
USB port and another device is plugged into the
Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
you to select which device to use.
Front Center Stack AUX Jack And USB Ports
There are multiple USB “Charge Only” ports in this
vehicle.
In the floor tray.
On the back of the front row seats (if equipped)
Above the rear cup holder in the third row seats
(if equipped)
USB Charging Port In The Floor Tray
NOTE:
The USB outlet in the bottom of the instrument
panel can be switched from ignition only to
constant battery powered all the time. See an
authorized dealer for details.
Rear Seat USB Charging Port
1 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 1
2 — Type C And Type A USB Ports 2
3 — AUX Port
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
3rd Row USB Charging Port
NOTE:
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Different scenarios are listed below when a
non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same USB
port. Please disconnect the first device to use
the second device”.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may
cause the connection to a previous device to be
lost.
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets, and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB ports, that
can be used to power cellular phones, small
electronics and other low powered electrical
accessories. The power outlets can be labeled with
either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to indicate how
the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with a
key symbol are powered when the ignition is in the
ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a
battery symbol are connected directly to the
battery and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the battery powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
The front power outlet is located at the bottom of
the instrument panel.
12 Volt Front Power Outlet
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlets, there is also
a power outlet located in the rear cargo area.
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F95A (Ignition)/F95B (Battery) I/P Power
Outlet 10A (If Equipped)
2 — F85 Cigar Lighter 20A
3 — F60 RR Cargo Power Outlet 20A
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
Accessories that draw higher power
(i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.)
will degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories,
or long periods of the vehicle not being started
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
battery.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar® parts.
The cigar lighter is located at the bottom of the
instrument panel. Push lighter inward to heat.
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically
returns to its initial position and is ready to be
used.
SMOKER'S PACKAGE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
With the optional authorized dealer-installed
Smoker's Package Kit, a removable ash receiver is
inserted into one of the two cupholders in the
center floor console. To install the ash receiver,
align the receiver so the thumb grip on the lid is
facing rearward. Push the ash receiver into either
of the cup wells to secure. Pull upward on the ash
receiver to remove for cleaning and/or storage.
The left rear trim panel cupholder is designed to
accommodate a second ash receiver, if desired.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window switches on the driver’s door trim
panel control all of the door windows.
Driver’s Power Window Controls
The driver may lock out the rear power windows by
pushing the bar control just below the power
window controls.
Power Window Lockout Switch
The window switches will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
NOTE:
Power Window controls will also remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition has been
placed in the OFF position, depending upon the
accessory delay setting. Opening a front door will
cancel this feature.
There is a single control on the front passenger’s
door trim panel which operates the passenger door
window and a set of controls that lock and unlock
all doors. The controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and
during power accessory delay.
WARNING!
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very
hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar
lighter with care. Always check that the cigar
lighter has turned off.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do not
damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rating
is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sliding Side Door Power Window Control —
If Equipped
Second row passengers may open and close the
sliding door window by a single control on the door
handle assembly.
The controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position and during
power accessory delay.
NOTE:
The controls will not operate if the driver has acti-
vated the Power Window Lockout.
Sliding Door Power Window Control
NOTE:
The sliding door windows do not fully open,
stopping several inches above the window sill.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the
window switch down for a short period of time,
then release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of time
and release; the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window switch again to close the window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch
lightly and hold to close the window manually.
RESET AUTO UP
To reactivate the Auto Up feature, perform the
following steps after vehicle power is restored:
1. Pull the window control up to close the
window completely and continue to hold the
control up for an additional two seconds after
the window is closed.
2. Push the window control down firmly to the
second detent to open the window completely
and continue to hold the control down for an
additional two seconds after the window is
fully open.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers
and all objects from the window path before
closing.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
minimized. If the rear windows are open and
buffeting occurs, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting.
HOOD
OPENING
The hood release lever (to open the primary latch)
and safety latch (to open the secondary latch)
must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the front of the vehicle.
3. Push the safety latch release lever toward the
passenger side of the vehicle. The safety latch
is located behind the center front edge of the
hood.
Safety Latch Release Lever Location
4. Remove the support rod from the locking tab
and insert it into the seat located on the
underside of the hood.
NOTE:
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper
arms are not in motion and not in the lifted
position.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Vehicle must be at a stop and the transmission
must be in PARK.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLOSING
1. Hold up the hood with one hand and with the
other hand remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
2. Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop it. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
LIFTGATE
TO UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to release the liftgate.
The key fob and the overhead console button will
release the liftgate when the liftgate is locked.
The outside handle requires the liftgate to be
unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive
Entry, pulling the outside handle will unlock and
release the liftgate, with a valid Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate.
Unlock Liftgate Using Passive Entry
NOTE:
When you push the Passive Entry button, either
only the liftgate will unlock, or all the doors and the
liftgate will unlock, depending on the selected
setting in the Uconnect system Ú page 148.
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock
button located to the right of the outside handle to
lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
could open when the vehicle is in motion and
block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to close.
Make sure hood is fully closed for both latches.
Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at
high speed. Do not use the recirculation
mode.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened or closed in
several ways:
Overhead console liftgate button
Key fob
Outside handle (open or reset liftgate latch)
Button just inside the liftgate on the upper left
trim (when liftgate is open)
Using the above ways to open or close the liftgate:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate will
open
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse
Push the Power Liftgate button on the overhead
console to open or close the liftgate.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
five seconds to open or close the liftgate.
Overhead Console Power Switches
The key fob and the overhead console button will
operate the liftgate when the liftgate is locked. The
outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
pressing the touch pad on the outside handle will
unlock and open the liftgate, with a valid Passive
Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate
handle.
NOTE:
Tones are sounded and the turn signals are
flashed with liftgate movements. These alerts can
be turned on or off in Uconnect Settings
Ú page 148.
To Close The Liftgate
The liftgate can also be closed using the Rear
Interior Power Liftgate button (if equipped), located
in the upper left trim in the liftgate opening.
Rear Interior Power Liftgate Switch
1 — Liftgate
2 — Right Sliding Door
3 — Sliding Door Power Off
4 — Left Sliding Door
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the outside
handle will lock the vehicle.
NOTE:
If the power liftgate will not fully open or latch
close, check the latch for damage or obstacles that
may be preventing the closing operation. If the
problem persists, proceed as follows:
1. Press the electronic liftgate release handle on
the outside of the liftgate to home/reset the
latch mechanism.
2. Manually close the liftgate by pulling
downward using the closing handle.
3. Resume normal power liftgate open or closing
operation.
If the home/reset procedure is unsuccessful, see
an authorized dealer for service.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area Storage
When the third row seats are not in the stowed
position, there is a large area for cargo storage.
Rear Cargo Area
NOTE:
With all rear seats stowed or removed, 4 x 8 ft
(1.2 x 2.4 m) sheets of building material will fit on
the vehicle floor with the liftgate closed. The front
seats must be moved slightly forward of the
rearmost position.
STOW ‘N PLACE ROOF RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack.
The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and
should be uniformly distributed over the luggage
rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should
always be used whenever cargo is placed on the
roof rack. Check the straps frequently to be sure
that the load remains securely attached.
Roof Rack
The Stow ‘N Place roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum
vehicle load capacity.
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
DEPLOYING THE CROSSBARS
1. To deploy the crossbars, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends of the
crossbar and lift the crossbar from its stowed
position in the side rail. Repeat with crossbar
on the opposite side.
Thumb Screw
NOTE:
The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
Removing Crossbars
2. Bend the crossbar supports at each end,
taking care to keep hand clear of pivoting joint.
Slide the thumb screw down.
Bending Pivot
3. Position the crossbars across the roof making
sure the letters on the crossbars align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
Positioning Crossbars
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Once the crossbar is in place, tighten both
thumb screws completely.
Installing Crossbars
5. Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to
complete the deployment of the crossbars.
NOTE:
The crossbars are not identical and have fixed
deployment positions. Rear crossbar can be
deployed in two different positions.
STOWING THE CROSSBARS
1. Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen
the thumb screws at both ends. Lift the
crossbar away from the matching letter to
remove it from the deployed position. Repeat
with the other crossbar.
2. Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the
pivot supports at each end.
Crossbar Pivot
3. Then, position the crossbar along the correct
side rail. Make sure the letters on the crossbar
align with the matching letters on the side rail.
Stowing Crossbars
4. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Crossbar To Side Rail
CAUTION!
Use care when removing and handling the
crossbars to prevent damage to the vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
(Continued)
5. Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place,
tighten the thumb screws completely.
Tightening Crossbar
6. Repeat the procedure to stow the second
crossbar on the opposite side.
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in
the side rails when they are not in use.
If any metallic object is placed over the satellite
radio antenna (if equipped), you may experience
interruption of satellite radio reception.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off
the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
in personal injury or property damage. Follow
the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on
your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
DO NOT carry any loads on the roof rack
without the crossbars deployed. The load
should be secured and placed on top of the
crossbars, not directly on the roof. If it is
necessary to place the load on the roof, place
a blanket or other protective layer between
the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
the load appropriately.
Load should always be secured to cross bars
first, with tie down loops used as additional
securing points if needed. Tie loops are
intended as supplementary tie down points
only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with
the tie loops. Check the straps and thumb
wheels frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
Long loads that extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
with large frontal area should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
large flat loads and may result in damage to
the cargo or your vehicle.
CAUTION!
2
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 89
90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this
display shows the instrument cluster
display messages Ú page 92.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge can indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather or up
mountain grades. It should not be allowed
to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the fuel
tank when the ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the
fuel door is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the
driver. With the ignition in the OFF position (and the
key removed, for vehicles with mechanical key),
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles or
kilometers in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and
give you warnings when they are not. The steering
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through
and enter the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reaches “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the gauge drops back into the normal range
and is no longer red. If the gauge remains on the
“H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
Ú page 296.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s instrument cluster is equipped with
an instrument cluster display (base or premium
cluster), which offers useful information to the
driver.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display controls allows the
driver to select information by pushing the
directional buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Controls
Back / Left Arrow Button
Push and release the
left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the
up arrow button to
scroll upward through the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the
right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the
down arrow button to
scroll downward through the Main Menu items.
OK Button
Push the
OK button to access/select the infor-
mation screens or submenu screens of a Main
Menu item. Push and hold the
OK button for two
seconds to reset displayed/selected features
that can be reset.
The instrument cluster display (base/premium
cluster) features a driver interactive display that is
located in the center of the instrument cluster, and
may include the following menu/submenu items:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip (Trip A / Trip B)
Stop / Start — If Equipped
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Speed Warning — If Equipped
OIL LIFE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display for approxi-
mately five seconds after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate it is time to change the
engine oil. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, depen-
dent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance, refer to
the following procedure.
NOTE:
This procedure should only be performed after
scheduled maintenance is completed. Resetting
oil life other than when associated with a
scheduled maintenance may result in damage due
to not properly maintaining the engine oil.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the vehicle.)
2. Push the OK button to enter the instrument
cluster display menu screen.
3. Push and release the
down arrow button to
access the ”Vehicle Info” menu screen.
4. Push the
left arrow button or right arrow
button to access the “Oil Life” submenu.
5. Hold the
OK button to reset the “Oil Life” to
100%.
6. Push the
up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display menu screen.
Secondary Method For Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start
the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start
the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
KEYSENSE CLUSTER MESSAGES —
I
F EQUIPPED
When the KeySense key is in use there will be:
Continuous, dedicated telltale
Unique Display Splash Screen
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
With KeySense in use there will be multiple associated messages shown in the following table:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
the main menu items for several features. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
the driver interactive display menu options until
the desired menu is reached Ú page 92.
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items display
in the center of the instrument cluster. Menu items
may vary depending on your vehicle features.
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until Speedometer is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to toggle between MPH and km/h.
Setting Instrument Cluster Display Message
None – With vehicle ignition ON “KeySense in use. Max vehicle speed set to xx MPH/or km/h”
Max Vehicle Speed
“Max speed reached. KeySense in use” supported by a chime
“Approaching max speed xx MPH/km/h” supported by a chime
Start Up Fuel Alert message “Range to empty xxx miles or km”
Early Low Fuel Alert Message “Fuel Low”
ParkSense “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Blind Spot “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
Forward Collision Warning “Feature cannot be disabled. KeySense in use”
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until Vehicle Info is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the
left or
right arrow button to scroll through the following
information submenus:
Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is
OK for all tires, a vehicle ICON is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner
of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate Tire
To XX” is displayed with the vehicle ICON, and the
tire pressure values in each corner of the ICON with
the pressure value of the low tire displayed in a
different color than the other tire pressure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
“Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot
be reset Ú page 207.
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Transmission Temp
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Oil Temp
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Oil Life
Displays the remaining engine oil life as a
percentage.
To reset the Oil Life, you must hold the
OK button.
The “Hold OK to Reset” instruction will be
displayed at all times, but the following conditions
will need to be met in order to reset Oil Life:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position
If the conditions are met, holding the
OK button will
reset the gauge and the numeric display will return
to 100%.
If the conditions are not met, a pop-up message
will display for five seconds, describing the
required conditions, and then the Oil Life screen
will reappear.
Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy Menu item is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. The
Fuel Economy Menu will display the following:
Two submenu pages that can be toggled
between using the
left and right arrow
buttons; one with Current Value displayed and
one without the Current Value displayed:
Average Fuel Economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
Range To Empty (miles or km)
Current Fuel Economy
(MPG, L/100 km, or km/L)
The Max and Min values will correspond to
the particular engine requirements
Hold
OK to reset average fuel economy
information.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push the
left or
right arrow button to scroll through the Trip A
and Trip B submenus. The Trip information will
display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the
OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed
in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until the Audio Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until Messages is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing the
right arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
NOTE:
The pop-up messages indicate the status of the
system and/or the conditions that need to be met.
Messages remain in the stored stack until
condition is cleared.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter the submenus. The Screen
Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is
displayed.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
1 — Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
2 — Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3 — Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Current (MPG, L/100km, or km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio Menu Title
Menu Title
Digital Speed
4 — Defaults
Restore
Cancel
Base Instrument Cluster Display Screen Setup Options:
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Speed Warning — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow
button until Speed Warning is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter Speed Warning. Use the
up or down arrow button to turn the Speed
Warning ON or OFF, then push and release the
OK
button to confirm the selection. If the ON status is
selected, use the
up or down arrow button
to set the desired speed, then push the
OK button
to set the speed for the Speed Warning. A Speed
Warning telltale will illuminate in the instrument
cluster, with a number matching the set speed,
with a pop-up message to inform the driver that the
Speed Warning has been set to the desired speed.
Each time the set speed is exceeded, a single
chime will sound and a pop-up warning message
will display. If the set speed is exceeded more than
2 mph (3 km/h), a continuous chime will sound for
up to 10 seconds, or until the speed is no longer
exceeded. The telltale in the instrument cluster will
also change from white to yellow, and a pop-up
warning message will pop-up on the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
Speed Warning is unavailable while KeySense
is in use.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
the electrical system and status of the vehicle
battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the 12 Volt vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will
take place to extend the driving time and distance
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential 12 Volt electrical loads.
Load reduction will be functional when the vehicle
propulsion system is active.
The vehicle may not be running depending on the
High Voltage (HV) battery State Of Charge (SOC) or
temperature. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or
will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When 12 Volt load reduction is activated, the
message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load
reduction. The charging system performs a diag-
nostic on the charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may
indicate a problem with the charging system
Ú page 102.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because
the electrical loads are larger than the capability
of charging system. The charging system is still
functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volts,
150W, USB ports) during certain driving condi-
tions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter
electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms
and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period
of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not
charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load
left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present
(“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights
(interior or exterior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw
currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles
(distance, driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
up or
down arrow button until “Trip Info” is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Navigate between Trip A or Trip B by using the
right and left arrow buttons.
For each trip the following information will be
displayed:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip A since the last
reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A since
the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when
the ignition switch is in the ON or START
position.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the Average MPG for Trip B since the last
reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B since
the last reset. Elapsed time will increment when
the ignition switch is in the ON or START posi-
tion.
To Reset A Trip Function
Push and hold the
OK button to reset the currently
displayed trip.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive
and/or alternative to the information contained in
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first if
applicable. The system check menu may appear
different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional
and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and will
turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb
check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the
air bag has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake
light turns on it may indicate that the
parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock
Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has
been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run
when applying the brake, and a brake pedal
pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
in the master cylinder has dropped below a
specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked
immediately.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light
should then turn off unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an
authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
cation.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays
on while the engine is running, there may
be a malfunction with the charging
system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
This indicator will reflect which doors are
open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 123.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC system.
If a problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed
in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see
an authorized dealer for service as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four
minutes or until the engine is able to cool;
whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C)
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service
Ú page 275.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
hood is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer.
A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When
driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will flash or remain on continuously and a chime
will sound Ú page 211.
Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn
of a high transmission fluid temperature.
This may occur with strenuous usage
such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or
slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
turns off, you may continue to drive normally.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will flash at a fast rate
for approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security system is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is required as
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position,
have the brake system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC
is activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system.
If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over,
come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission damage
or transmission failure.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 1.85 gal (7 L) this warning
light will turn on, and remain on until fuel
is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN position before engine start.
If the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if
the light stays on through several typical driving
styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive
normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to
alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
occurs.
Service Automatic Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the AEB Warning
System. Contact an authorized dealer for
service Ú page 204.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact
an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 123.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach
higher temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver,
occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power
loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that the
tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be
guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
previously mentioned, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label.
If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may result
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) OFF
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
that Forward Collision Warning is off.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired
speed Ú page 125.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on.
KeySense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The KeySense indicator is illuminated
when a KeySense key is detected upon
startup of the vehicle. The indicator will
remain lit for the entire key cycle as a
reminder that the KeySense key is in use. While
the KeySense key is in use, the vehicle will respond
to settings associated with the KeySense profile
Ú page 12.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the parking lights or headlights are
turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop”
mode Ú page 123.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up
(right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is ready, but not set
Ú page 125.
Set Speed Display Indicator Light
The Set Speed Display indicator light
indicates the set speed for the Cruise
Control and Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) settings.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam headlights
are on. With the low beams activated,
push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to
pass” scenario.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as well
as emissions well within current government
regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II
system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
information to assist your service technician in
making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually
be drivable and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need
to access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 147.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control
system. It could also affect fuel economy and
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced
before any emissions tests can be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be
impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions
control system. Failure to pass could prevent
vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is
functioning and is not on when the
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is
ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may
not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready,
you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until
you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is
not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
in order for your OBD II system to update.
A recheck with the previously mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now
ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
MIL is on with the engine running.
3
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 109
110
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten
your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P) position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, push the button
again.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three positions; OFF,
ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition positions
without starting the vehicle and to use the
accessories follow these steps:
Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
place the ignition to the ACC position (instru-
ment cluster will display “ACC”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second
time to place the ignition to the RUN position
(instrument cluster will display “ON/RUN”).
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF position
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 92.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children, and do
not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
may cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
AUTOPARK
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK if the situations below
occur. It is a back up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
are outlined on the following pages.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in
PARK by looking for the “P” in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking brake.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver
attempts to turn off the engine, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to
the PARK position. The gear selector will
automatically reset itself to the PARK position. The
vehicle’s ignition will then move to the OFF position
(engine off). When AutoPark is activated the
instrument cluster will display the message
“AutoPark Engaged”.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver has pushed the ENGINE START/STOP
button
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the
vehicle with the engine running, if certain
conditions are met, the vehicle will AutoPark,
automatically shifting the vehicle’s transmission to
the PARK position. The Electric Park Brake SAFE
HOLD feature will also activate in some conditions
Ú page 117.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
the instrument cluster display and near the
gear selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking,
your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a back up system and
should not be relied upon as the primary
method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
into PARK.
CAUTION!
Engine will remain running.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AutoPark In Stop/Start Autostop Mode
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a gear selector
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s door is ajar
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled or brake pedal is
not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged” will display in
the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
To Turn On The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake
switch momentarily.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may Park.
PARK will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to
P” will display in the instrument cluster display if
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). The
gear position indicator will blink continuously until
the gear selector is returned to the proper position,
or the requested shift can be completed.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(B
ELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures,
use of an externally powered electric engine block
heater (available from an authorized dealer) is
recommended.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is not below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
when the driver shifts into PARK, the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the
vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h)
and the above conditions are met, enabling
AutoPark. A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position
can roll. As an added precaution, always apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started this
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started,
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 272.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING
ENGINE START/STOP B
UTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF
position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
before the engine will shut off. The ignition
switch position will remain in the ACC position
until the gear selector is in PARK and the
button is pushed twice to the OFF position.
If the gear selector is not in PARK and the
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once,
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission
is in PARK, the system will automatically time out
after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will
switch to the OFF position.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), the
engine block heater is recommended. For ambient
temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the engine
block heater is required.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the
hood, behind to the passenger’s side headlamp.
Follow the steps below to properly use the engine
block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind
the passenger’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the hook-and-loop strap that secures the
heater cord in place.
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and
plug it into a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord
to the hook-and-loop strap and properly stow
away behind the passenger’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not equipped,
heater cords are available from an authorized
dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volts
AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine
and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within
the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good
break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low
gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory
is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant.
Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate conditions under which vehicle operations
will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades Ú page 287.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first
few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in
and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers
simple operation, and some additional features
that make the parking brake more convenient and
useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before
leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways;
Manually, by applying the parking brake switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
feature in the customer programmable features
Ú page 148.
The EPB is located in the integrated center stack.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, push the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged,
the BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster
and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If
your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the
parking brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be
applied even when the ignition switch is OFF,
however, it can only be released when the ignition
switch in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB switch
is held for longer than 180 seconds. The light will
extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage whenever
the transmission is placed into PARK. Once the
parking brake is engaged, the BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED
indicator on the switch will illuminate. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
is engaging.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral
Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The parking brake will release automatically when
the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position, the
transmission is in DRIVE or REVERSE, and the
driver seat belt is buckled and an attempt is made
to drive the vehicle away by pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Press on
the brake pedal, then push the parking brake
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking brake
disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp
in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on
the switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
the parking brake before placing the gear selector
in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, push on the EPB switch for as
long as engagement is desired. The BRAKE
warning lamp will illuminate, and a continuous
chime will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury
or damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to
brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may
allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or
injury.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage
to the brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is
in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
brought to a complete stop using the parking
brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
3 mph (4.8 km/h), the parking brake will remain
engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. This
may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning lamp
flashing. In this case, urgent service of the EPB
system is required. Do not rely on the parking
brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) can be programmed
to be applied automatically whenever the vehicle is
at a standstill and the automatic transmission is
placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled and
disabled by customer selection through the
customer programmable features Ú page 148.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the Electric Park
Brake (EPB) system that will engage the parking
brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured.
If the automatic transmission is not in PARK, the
seat belt is unbuckled, the driver door is open, the
vehicle is at a standstill, and there is no attempt to
press the brake pedal or accelerator pedal, the
parking brake will automatically engage to prevent
the vehicle from rolling.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing
the EPB while the driver door is open and brake
pedal is pressed. Once manually bypassed,
SafeHold will be enabled again once the vehicle
reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled
to the OFF position and back to ON again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
for which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. You should only enter Brake Service
Mode during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
Electric Park Brake (EPB) system, this can only be
done after retracting the EPB actuator.
Fortunately, actuator retraction can be done easily
by entering the brake service in your vehicle
Ú page 148. This menu based system will guide
you through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
Brake Service Mode has requirements that must
be met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be unapplied.
The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will flash
continuously while the ignition switch is ON.
When brake service work is complete, the following
steps must be followed to reset the parking brake
system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for
which you have the knowledge and the right
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above
idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in
PARK before the ignition can be turned to the OFF
mode. This helps the driver avoid inadvertently
leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in
the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the
ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is
in PARK, and the ignition is
OFF (not in ACC mode)
before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of
PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed. The brake pedal must also
be pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
low speeds.
9-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The transmission is controlled using a rotary
electronic gear selector located on the center
console. The transmission gear selector has PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and LOW shift
positions. Using the LOW position manually
downshifts the transmission to a lower gear based
on vehicle speed. The transmission gear range
(PRNDL) is displayed both above the gear selector
and in the instrument cluster. To select a gear
range, simply rotate the gear selector. Push down
on the gear selector and then rotate it, to access
the L position. You must also press the brake pedal
to shift the transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when stopped or moving at low speeds). To shift
past multiple gear ranges at once (such as PARK to
DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector to the
appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission gear
(for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
the position indicator will blink continuously until
the selector is returned to the proper position, or
the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts
its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
with environmental and road conditions. The
transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed
to meet the needs of current and future FWD/AWD
vehicles. Software and calibration is refined to
optimize the customer’s driving experience and
fuel economy. By design, some vehicle and
driveline combinations utilize NINTH gear only in
very specific driving situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when shifting between these
gears.
Transmission Gear Selector
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
GEAR RANGES
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
ating. This is especially important when the engine
is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb
on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition off.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute
for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to
guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
cator solidly indicates PARK (P) without
blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is properly
indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
always come to a complete stop, then apply
the parking brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
The following indicators should be used to ensure
that you have properly engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
Look at the transmission gear position display
and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK
if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The
transmission automatically upshifts through all
forward gears. The DRIVE position provides
optimum driving characteristics under all normal
operating conditions.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the transmission controller may
modify the transmission shift schedule, reduce
engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque
converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light will
illuminate, a warning message will appear in the
instrument cluster, and the transmission may
operate differently until the transmission cools
down.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
sion gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL
can cause severe transmission damage.
If Recreational Towing Ú page 144.
If Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 278.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation
may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm up time of the
engine and transmission to achieve maximum
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter
clutch, and shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear, are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm
Ú page 122. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
LOW (L)
Use this range for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the
transmission will downshift for increased engine
braking. To access the LOW position, push down
on the gear selector and rotate it fully clockwise.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically
for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
that could result in transmission damage,
Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this
mode, the transmission may operate only in a fixed
gear, or may remain in NEUTRAL. The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging
the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If
not, shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is
required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has
been included in the automatic transmission on
your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter
engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This
may result in a slightly different feeling or response
during normal operation in the upper gears.
When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically
disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm (usually
after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving). Because
the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if
the transmission is not shifting properly when the
vehicle is cold. This is normal. The torque converter
clutch will function normally once the powertrain is
sufficiently warm.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system is designed to
address exhaust and engine noise. The system
relies on four microphones embedded in the
headliner, which monitor exhaust and engine
noise, and assists an onboard frequency
generator, which creates counteracting sound
waves in the audio system’s speakers. This helps
keep the vehicle quiet at idle and during drive.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, this
indicates an over temperature condition in the
power steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off
Ú page 101.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" OR
"POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF -
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
steering wheel icon are displayed on the
instrument cluster screen, it indicates that the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service.
It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance Ú page 101.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
vers.
The power steering system is fully electric; it
requires no power steering fluid.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal,
pressing the accelerator pedal or shifting out of
DRIVE (D) will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded
engine parts to handle the additional engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a
STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE.
To Activate Auto STOP/START, The Following Must
Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster within the
Stop/Start section Ú page 101.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
throughout the Auto Stop/Start process.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
should be obtained as soon as possible.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions for Stop/Start
and ensure they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system may
be viewed in the instrument cluster display
Stop/Start screen. In the following situations the
engine will not stop:
If Stop/Start is manually disabled by the
Stop/Start OFF button.
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging".
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
sure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temperature too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous Autostop.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system going
into a STOP/START READY state under more
extreme conditions of the items listed above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN AUTO
S
TOP/START
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is
pressed. The transmission will automatically
re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Auto Stop/Start:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low. During this time a
message will display "Stop/Start Not Ready
Battery Charging".
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and the autostop mode
will be disabled Ú page 101.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
ON mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and
back ON.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE
S
TOP/START SYSTEM
After turning off the Stop/Start system, push the
Stop/Start OFF switch again (located on the switch
bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
the system will not shut down the engine. A
“SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message will
appear in the instrument cluster display and the
Stop/Start telltale will remain yellow Ú page 92.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system for cruising at a constant preset
speed.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right
side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the on/off button a second time. The
cruise indicator light will turn off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not
in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have an
accident. Always leave the system off when you
are not using it.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (+) or
SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed,
push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease
speed by pushing the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will
result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button is
released, then the new set speed will be estab-
lished.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When
the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the
set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and
down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or
gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in
the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your
vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and
you could lose control and have an accident. Do
not use Cruise Control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
slippery.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, the vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can override the automatic braking
function by pressing the gas pedal, turning Park-
Sense off via ParkSense switch, or changing the
gear while the automatic brakes are being
applied.
Automatic brakes will not be available if
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is not
available.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense
Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
The automatic braking function may not provide
enough vehicle deceleration to avoid colliding
with a detected obstacle depending on vehicle
speed, road conditions, and brake capability.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for moving obstacles that
approach the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer-Program-
mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
tion state for the automatic braking function
through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
gear.
NOTE:
The system is provided to assist the driver and
not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for controlling the vehicle's
movements.
For limitations of this system and
recommendations/precautions, see Ú page 131.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at
this gear selector position, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in
REVERSE and above the system's operating speed,
a warning will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The
system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of the
Uconnect system Ú page 148.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 92. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle
has been detected, the warning display will turn on
indicating the system status, and remain on until
the vehicle is moved out of REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions based
on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to
the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region,
the display will show a single solid arc in the center
rear region and will produce a one-half second
tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the sound tone will change from
slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single flashing
arc in the left and/or right rear region and will
produce a fast sound tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from fast to continuous.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert
operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense switch, located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will show the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
NOTE:
When KeySense feature is present, the ParkSense
system will reject customer input to turn the
system off via the hard switch. The instrument
cluster display will show a "KeySense in Use
Selected Feature Cannot be Disabled" message.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear
Park Assist system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system
has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display Ú page 92 will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS"
or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for five seconds while the
vehicle is in REVERSE. The vehicle graphic will
remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and
clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt, or other obstruction
and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash
soap, and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt, and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF”. Once you
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,
the instrument cluster display will show “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt, or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle
behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
fascia/bumper.
ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
is in the open position.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if objects such as bicycle carriers,
trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 12 inches
(30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to
do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a blockage or sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to
see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear.
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
temporarily detected or not detected at all.
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
mable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect system Ú page 148.
ParkView Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
exited and the previous screen appears.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
A touchscreen button to disable display of the
camera image is made available when the vehicle
is not in REVERSE gear. Display of the camera
image after shifting out of REVERSE can be
disabled via a touchscreen button personalization
entry in the camera settings menu.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the
lens.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red
0 - 1 ft
(0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to pay
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
recommended that the driver look frequently
over his/her shoulder when using ParkView.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors inside
the pipe seal the system.
1. Put the vehicle in PARK and switch the
ignition OFF.
2. Push the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
(3 o'clock position) and release to open.
Fuel Filler Door
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds both flapper doors
while refueling.
4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
5. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after the nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain
from the nozzle.
6. Remove the fuel filler nozzle.
7. To close the fuel filler door, push the
center-rear edge (3 o’clock position) of the fuel
filler door and then release. The fuel filler door
will latch closed.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
filler door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push
on the fuel filler door around the perimeter to
break the ice build-up.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side door or
pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this
label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of
manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear GAWR. Total
load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear
GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
(axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles, or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability do not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The
front and rear curb weight values are determined
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined separately
to be sure that the load is properly distributed over
the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles
has been exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR.
If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or
rear to front as appropriate until the specified
weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items
down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before
driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse
effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles
and the way the brakes operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Also overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions will
assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you
do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 134.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of
all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by
the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 134.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
Trailer Frontal Area
The Frontal Area is the maximum height multiplied
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions
while traveling.
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A Weight-Carrying Hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
These kinds of hitches are commonly used to tow
small and medium sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A Weight-Distributing Hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more
level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also
dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds
and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. TSC and a Weight Distributing (load
equalizing) Hitch are recommended for heavier TW
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling, stability,
braking performance, and could result in a
collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,721 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo, and should never exceed the weight refer-
enced on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
VEHICLE LOADING CHART
Follow these steps to determine the total weight
the vehicle can carry:
1. Determine the cargo capacity of your vehicle.
Load Capacity = GVWR – Curb (weight of
vehicle full fluids NO occupants).
2. Determine occupant count.
For calculation purposes, average weight of
an occupant is 150 lb (68 kg).
EXAMPLE:
GVWR = 6005 lb (2723 kg)
CURB = 4500 lb (2041 kg)
Load Capacity = GVWR – CURB = 6005 lb
(2723 kg) - 4500 lb (2041 kg) = 1505 lb
(682 kg)
4 Occupants (at 150 lb [68 kg]) + Max Trailer =
1505 lb (682 kg) – 600 lb (272 kg) (4 x 150 lb
[68 kg]) – 360 lb (163 kg) (10% of 3600 lb
[1632 kg]) = 545 lb (247 kg) of cargo in vehicle
Engine/Transmission
Trailer Tow
Package
GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW
3.6L/Automatic
Yes 8,600 lb (3,900 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 3,600 lb (1,632 kg) 360 lb (163 kg)
No 6,500 lb (2,948 kg) 40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 1500 lb (680 kg) 149 lb (67 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
Make sure loading does not exceed GAWR of front or rear axles.
GAWR is found on sticker in driver’s side door jamb.
Number Of Persons / Weight Of Occupants Max Cargo No Trailer
Tongue Load, Max
Trailer
Max Cargo With Max
Trailer 360 lb
(163 kg) Tongue
Load
2 People / 300 lb (136 kg)
1205 lb (546 kg)
1205 lb (546 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) =
845 lb (383 kg)
845 lb (383 kg)
4 people / 600 lb (272 kg)
955 lb (433 kg)
955 lb (433 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) =
545 lb (247 kg)
545 lb (247 kg)
7 people / 1050 lb (476 kg)
455 lb (206 kg)
455 lb (206 kg) –
360 lb (163 kg) =
95 lb (43 kg)
95 lb (43 kg)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
(Continued)
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle Ú page 316.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing” Ú page 281 When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven.
The engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading
can cause a loss of control, poor performance
or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning
corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
a grade. When parking, apply the parking
brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
transmission in PARK. For four-wheel drive
vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
NEUTRAL. Always, block or "chock" the trailer
wheels.
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when
towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 319.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking
and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer with
electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
brake system, an electronic brake controller is
not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers
in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are
required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
trailer harness and connector.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your
brake system and cause it to fail. You might
not have brakes when you need them and
could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
distances.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect)
into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For increased
engine braking on steep downhill grades, select
the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
To avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement, you must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if rear
wheels are on the ground). The Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features Ú page 148.
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
If your vehicle is disabled and in need of commercial towing service, for further information Ú page 278.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground FWD Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front OK
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF the ground.
Ensure that the EPB is released, and remains released, while being towed.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
Recreational Towing
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the
ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the transmission in PARK.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
7. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do
not start the vehicle.
8. Press and hold the brake pedal.
9. Release the parking brake.
10. Turn the ignition OFF.
11. Release the brake pedal.
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Information in this section will aid in safe
controlled launches in adverse conditions.
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other
slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to
pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon
occurs when there is a difference in the surface
traction under the front (driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible
for a wedge of water to build-up between the tire
and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may
cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control
and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the
following precautions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads
are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a
collision in a sudden stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few
inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution
to ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden
pulling of the front wheels. You could lose
control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
4
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following
Warnings and Cautions before doing so.
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm
run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road
or path's surface and cause your vehicle to sink
into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or
rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases
stopping distances. Therefore, after driving
through standing water, drive slowly and
lightly press on the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom
of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize
wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky
or foamy in appearance) after driving through
standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated,
as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause
serious internal damage to the engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 146
147
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 4
With 7-inch Display system, refer to Ú page 164.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless
communications. Vehicle software technology
continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC,
working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a
computer or other devices, your vehicle may
require software updates to improve the usability
and performance of your systems or to reduce the
potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security breach,
vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
able Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement or Ú page 108.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems
are breached. It may be possible that vehicle
systems, including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into your
vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-
cious software, and if installed in your vehicle,
it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the
instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/
Enter control knob located on the right side. Turn
the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings. Push the center of the control
knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off
and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn
off the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or
tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings
button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode, the Uconnect system
allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting option until a check mark appears next to
the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Once the setting is complete, either
press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu, or press the X button
on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on
the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
KeySense
The vehicle’s KeySense settings are protected by a unique four-digit PIN, which the vehicle owner creates when accessing the specific settings for the first
time. This four-digit PIN can only be reset by an authorized dealer.
After pressing the KeySense button on the touchscreen, and entering the KeySense PIN, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system on or off.
The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision
is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible
chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an
object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an
audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system.
The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Language
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert
lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both
the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Maximum Vehicle Speed
This setting will adjust the Maximum Vehicle Speed. This feature can be set to
65, 70, 75, 80, or 85 mph (90, 95, 100, 105 or 110 km/h) by using the “-”
and “+” options.
Start Up Fuel Level Message This setting will turn the Start Up Fuel Level Message on or off.
Earlier Low Fuel Alert This setting will turn the Earlier Low Fuel Alert on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system will
display in the chosen language. The available setting is:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
languages are English, Français, and Español.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on.
To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting
will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off.
To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting
will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after
five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Units
Voice
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will display
in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Capacity” (Gal [US],
Gal [UK], or L) units of measurement independently.
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition system.
The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from the system.
The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description from the system.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Clock
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
Setting Name Description
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
Safety & Driving Assistance
When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings.
These options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access
a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Automatic Emergency Braking
This setting will need to be selected to access certain safety features listed:
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — This setting will change the distance
at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium”
setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view, and the
possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW
system signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will
have the FCW system signal when an object is at a far distance from the
vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — This setting will turn the Forward Collision
Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW system.
The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime when a colli-
sion is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emer-
gency Braking system on or off.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected. The “Sound Only” setting will provide an audible chime when an
object is detected. The “Sound and Display” setting will provide both an
audible chime and a visual display when an object is detected.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Sliding Door Alert This setting will turn the Sliding Door Alert on and off.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
“Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights on the outside
mirrors and an audible chime.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Setting Name Description
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Flash Lights With Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door reverses. The available
options are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The “Auto Door Locks” feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or
lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature
(Keyless Enter ‘n Go™) on or off.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
Seats & Comfort
Sliding Door Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the sliding door reverses or
senses an obstacle. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights with Sliding Door
This setting will flash the lights when the sliding door is opening.
Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start
has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
Audio
When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of
time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
Phone/Bluetooth®
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Setting Name Description
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the “Do Not Disturb” settings menu. The settings are
“Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default), and
“Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used
to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a
music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will
display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel
Link is a separate subscription.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Restore Settings To Default
When the Restore Settings To Default button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to
its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings to Default
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software
for your vehicle.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode
and access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 167.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 178.
Settings
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 148.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll through a
list or tune a radio station.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system
off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the Volume & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to
reset the radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from
freezing or being stuck.
Feature Description
Controls — If Equipped
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated seats
and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions Ú page 60.
Feature Description
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app to
replace an existing shortcut in the main menu
bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the
system. It contains instructions on how to use the
system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions.
Failure to do so may result in injury or property
damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage to
the product. See an authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a
level that still allows you to hear outside traffic
and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use the
system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on the
system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture
away from the system. Besides damage to the
system, moisture can cause electric shocks as
with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed
dependent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or
sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.),
which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on
the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens
cleaning cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water solu-
tion ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the solvent
manufacturer's precautions and directions
Ú page 342.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on
the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three
and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center and controls the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing
the top of the rocker switch will increase the
volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on which
mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for the
next available station and pushing the bottom of
the switch will Seek Down for the next available
station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that you
have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
Double pressing the bottom button switch will skip
to the previous track if it is after eight seconds into
the current track.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter
the Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM,
FM, and SXM, can then be selected by pressing the
corresponding buttons in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn on
and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the Volume & On/Off control knob
clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will
be set at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the
radio station frequency. Push the Enter/Browse
button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by
pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pushing the left steering wheel
audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band two
times, the radio will stop at the station where it
began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the
Seek Up or Seek Down button to advance
the radio through the available stations or
channels at a faster rate. The radio stops at the
next available station or channel when the button
on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Bar
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the
radio screen to directly tune to a desired radio
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot be
reached) will become deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered,
press “Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and
the system will automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would like
to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and
wait for the beep to say a command. See an
example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “
Help”. The system
provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit
siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM®
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com (US) or www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
US and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2021 SiriusXM® Radio
Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio
does not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the
radio does not have the necessary subscription,
the radio is able to receive the Preview channel
only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents visit
siriusxm.com/
getallaccess
or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://
www.siriusxm.ca/
or call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is
highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top
of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in
the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed
below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay,
Traffic/Weather button, and Favorite button
functions are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
REPLAY
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content
in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to
pause the playing of live or rewound content at any
time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/
Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content. The
radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five
seconds. Forwarding of the content can only be
done when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, cannot be done for live content. A
continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the
press is release.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume the playing of live content.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
within 20 seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X
button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a favorite
artist or song that is currently playing. The radio
then uses this information to alert you when either
the favorite artist or song is being played at any
time by any of the SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite artist, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a
favorite song, press the Favorites button on the
touchscreen and then the Favorite Song button on
the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When
pressing the All button, the following categories
become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll
the Channel List by pressing the Up and Down
arrows, located on the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the
Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the touch-
screen to display a list of Genres. You can select
any desired Genre by pressing the Genre List.
The radio tunes to a channel with the content in
the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located at
the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
Tune/Scroll knob as well.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the
Favorites list and to configure the Alert Settings,
along with providing a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating the
Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or press
the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu allows
you to choose from a visual alert or audible and
visual alert when one of your favorites is airing on
any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides you with
the ability to select teams, edit the selection, and
set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the radio
to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the touchscreen
to activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen
league and a scroll list of all teams within the
league will appear, then you can select a team by
pressing the corresponding box. A check mark
appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or press
the Trash Can icon next to the selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
“Alert me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert
upon score update” or both when one or more of
your selections is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music channel
using one of the 12 presets. This feature occurs
the first time the preset is selected during that
current song.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and
are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as
a preset, press and hold the numbered button on
the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
PRESET FEATURES — IF EQUIPPED
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can scroll
the preset list by rotation of the Tune/Scroll knob
or by pressing the Up and Down Arrow keys,
located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio button.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing the
X button.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between
the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers.
Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag the red Speaker
icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and
“3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction
as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This alters the
AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus
three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media device is
connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is turned on. Press
“Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the
driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source
Select button on the touchscreen and the desired
mode button on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
When available, you can select the Browse button
on the touchscreen to be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Info
button on the touchscreen for artist information on
the current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB port or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode
is entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device,
containing music, to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be
paired to the Uconnect Phone to communicate
with the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth®
button on the left side of the touchscreen or under
the Source Select/Select Source button
(if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Tracks
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX
device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into
the AUX port or by pressing the AUX button on the
left side of the touchscreen, or under the Source
Select button (if equipped) when a device is
already connected.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and the
radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode and
begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., selecting
playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) cannot be
provided by the radio; use the device controls
instead. Adjust the volume with the Volume button,
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or the On/Off rotary
knob, or with the volume of the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down button
on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or to return to the beginning
of the previous selection if the USB device is within
the first three seconds of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek
Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touchscreen
to return to the beginning of the current selection,
or return to the beginning of the previous selection
if the Bluetooth® device is within the first second
of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In USB
Mode, the left side of the browse window displays
a list of ways you can browse through the contents
of the USB device. If supported by the device, you
can browse by Folder, Artist, Playlist, Album, Song,
etc. Press the desired button on the touchscreen
on the left side of the screen. The center of the
browse window shows items and its sub-functions,
which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up
and Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll
knob can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. The
Repeat button on the touchscreen is highlighted
when active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat is
active. Press the Repeat button again to enter
Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
function is active. To cancel Repeat, press the
Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature off.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 168.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info button
on the touchscreen to display the current track
information. Press the Info or X button on the
touchscreen a second time to cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with
the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and below
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you
can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track
(indicated by the line above and below the track
name) and then push the Enter/Browse knob to
start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button on
the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the Song
List. The currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®,
and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only
available for connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch your
media source or choose an artist.
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest
Hits”; “
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre
Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match exactly
how the artist, album, song, and genre information
is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith
Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number
(“Search for John Smith Mobile”).
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they
are easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call
logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy
access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through
your vehicle’s audio system; the system will
automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as you
enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute
the system's microphone for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station. Ensure you phone is turned on
with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to the
Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system.
Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make calls,
show recent, incoming or outgoing calls, view
phonebook, etc. When you push the button you will
hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give a
command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call or want to make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to
access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect
Voice Command features if your vehicle is
equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like
“Call John Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
You will be prompted for a specific command and
then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait
for the beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt
or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands
can be used. For example, instead of saying
“Call” and then “John Smith” and then “mobile”,
the following compound command can be said:
“Call John Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the voice
command is given. You can also break the
commands into parts and say each part of the
command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,”
or you can break the compound command form
into two voice commands: “Search Contacts”
and when asked, “John Smith.” Please
remember, the Uconnect Phone works best
when you talk in a normal conversational tone,
as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences. The
system filters out certain non-word utterances and
sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The system handles
fill-in words such as “I would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone call”
and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in the
same phrase or sentence, the system identifies
the topic or context and provides the associated
follow-up prompt such as “Who do you want to
call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the user, it
will ask a question to which the user can respond
without pushing the Voice Command button on the
steering wheel.
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want
to know your options at any prompt, say “Help”
following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply
push the Phone button (if active) on your steering
wheel and say a command or say “Help”. All Phone
sessions begin with a push of the VR button or the
Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel”
and you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button
on your steering wheel when the system is listening
for a command and be returned to the main or
previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone
pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please
visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth® connec-
tions.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the PIN
from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add
Device button.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, select “Uconnect”
and accept the connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect
system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept
the connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only
one mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth®
audio device can be connected to the
Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is selected,
simply select “Uconnect” from the mobile
phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent phone paired will
have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and “contacts”.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen
on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect
system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first make sure to delete
the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your phone’s
Bluetooth® settings.
PAIR A BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
DEVICE
1. Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within
range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which
it was paired. The most recent device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to bring
up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you need to choose a particular
phone or audio device follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred Connected
Phone from the list.
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen,
press the Settings button located to the right
of the device name for a different phone or
audio device than the currently connected
device or press the preferred “Connected
Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has
the ability to download contact names and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature. Your
mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking for
permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow”
will sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the “Voice
Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the Blue-
tooth® wireless phone connection is made to
the Uconnect Phone, for example, after you start
the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to the
Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used. Until
then, if available, the previously downloaded
phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected
mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited
or deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can
only be edited on the mobile phone. The
changes are transferred and updated to
Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen, and
then press one of the +Add Favorite Contact
buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press the
Down Arrow button or the Settings Gear button
next to the selected number to display the
option’s pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from
the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the
Settings Gear icon next to the contact you want
to remove from your favorites. This will bring
up the options for that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available
and supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile
service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that
you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call
by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call
Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following
call features:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and press
“Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of
the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering
wheel and perform the operation. For example, say
“Show my incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio
system. Push the Phone button on the steering
wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and
answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is in
progress. Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications
from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep
your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For
your convenience, there is a counter display to
keep track of your missed calls and text messages
while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold
button on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the keypad (if supported by your
mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Swap Calls button on the phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on hold
at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the Phone
End button on the steering wheel. Only the active
call(s) will be terminated and if there is a call on
hold, it will become the new active call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call
on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition
has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system
until the phone becomes out of range for the Blue-
tooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
Transfer button on the touchscreen when leaving
the vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as
you would speak to a person sitting a few
feet/meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not always
work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in
your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in
motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say “O”
(letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and
network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is
ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume
all risks related to the use of the Uconnect
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use Uconnect when it is safe to do so. Failure to
do so may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to
say a command. See some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command,
push the Phone button and say “
Call”, then
pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your
phonebook. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers, you can say “
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button and
say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming
text message. (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messages
and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose the
message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the
Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible
with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a
text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected
to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use
your voice to send text messages, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your
natural language to understand what you mean
and responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the road
and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you
can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to
using the system Ú page 342.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® —
IF EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your
Uconnect system, and your
Android™ 6.0 or higher powered
smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your
smartphone and a number of its apps onto the
touchscreen radio display. Android Auto™ brings
you useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the radio
display’s touchscreen to control many of your
apps. To use Android Auto™, perform the following
procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your Android™-powered
smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered smartphone
to one of the media USB ports in your vehicle.
If the Android Auto™ app was not downloaded,
the first time you plug your device in the app
begins to download. Your vehicle should be in
PARK the first time you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable that
came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may
not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio screen.
Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Android Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately once a
compatible device is connected. You can also
launch it by pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc. for
music
Hands-free calling and texting for communica-
tion
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition (VR)
button on the steering wheel until the
beep or tap the Microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access other
navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canada).
For further information on the navigation function,
please refer to
https://support.google.com/
android
or https://support.google.com/
androidauto/
.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and
stream your favorite music with apps like
YouTube Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify.
Using your smartphone’s data plan, you
can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set up
on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™
for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to
https://
support.google.com/androidauto
.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push and
hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to activate voice recognition specific to
Android Auto™. This allows you to send
and reply to text messages, have incoming text
messages read out loud, and place and receive
hands-free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the compatible
apps that are available to use with Android Auto™,
every time it is launched. You must have the
compatible app downloaded, and you must be
signed in to the app through your mobile device for
it to work with Android Auto™.
Refer to
https://play.google.com/store/apps/ to
see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android Auto™
features may or may not be available in every
region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition
system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to
project your Android™-powered smartphone and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your Android™ 6.0 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto™ icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android Auto™.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the “Microphone” icon within
Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR, which
recognizes natural voice commands, to use a list of
your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 6.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ may be downloaded automati-
cally depending on the software version
installed on your mobile device.
To wirelessly use Android Auto™ on your car
display, you need a compatible Android™ smart-
phone with an active data plan. You can check
which smartphones are compatible at
g.co/
androidauto/requirements
.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
Uconnect works seamlessly with
Apple CarPlay®, the smarter,
more secure way to use your
iPhone® in the car, and stay
focused on the road. Use your
Uconnect Touchscreen display, the vehicle's knobs
and controls, and your voice with Siri to get access
to Apple Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are using
iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings,
ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for the very first
connection only, and then use the following
procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables
may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized,
the Phone icon on the drag & drop menu bar
changes to the Apple CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately. You
can also launch it by pressing the Apple CarPlay®
icon on the touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage
is shown on the left side of the radio screen. Data
plan rates apply.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold the
VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition session.
You can also press and hold the Home
button within Apple CarPlay® to start talking to Siri.
This allows you to make calls or listen to voicemail
as you normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not function
with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all
your artists, playlists, and music from
iTunes® or any third party application
installed on your device. Using your
iPhone’s® data plan, you can also use select third
party audio apps including music, news, sports,
podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply to
text messages. Siri can also read incoming text
messages, but drivers will not be able to read
messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap the
Microphone icon to ask Apple® Siri to
take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible apps
that are available to use, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through your
mobile device for it to work with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to
http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/
(Canada) to see the latest list of available apps for
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a number of
its apps onto your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect
your iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided Lightning cable,
and press the new Apple CarPlay® icon that
replaces your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar
to begin Apple CarPlay®.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
Push and hold the VR button on the steering wheel,
or press and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural
voice commands to use a list of your iPhone’s®
features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., registered
in the US and other countries. Apple® terms of use
and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any setup
required every time it is within range, if Bluetooth®
is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device is
unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices connected to
the Uconnect system. For example, if using Android
Auto™/Apple CarPlay®, the connected device will
be used to place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect system,
via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so the
passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console USB
ports.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy
performance from your radio. This condition may
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is
not harmful to the radio.
If your radio performance does not satisfactorily
improve from repositioning the mobile phone, it is
recommended that the volume be turned down or
off during mobile phone operation when not using
the Uconnect system.
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless
radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency
exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio
will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in
(20 cm) or further from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
on the wireless radio Ú page 342.
5
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 193
194
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and
brake performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle
is started and driven. During this self-check, you
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are beginning
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the
stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification
may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional
brake system will continue to operate normally if
the ABS Warning Light is on.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-
ence caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This
interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qual-
ified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This system
includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System
(TCS).These systems work together to enhance
both vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
Steering Torque (DST), Ready Alert Braking (RAB),
Rain Brake Support (RBS) and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and amount
of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
very quickly results in the best BAS assistance.
To receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
system is not functioning properly and that
immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the ESC and Electric Power
Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the
steering wheel for certain driving conditions in
which the ESC module is detecting vehicle
instability. The torque that the steering wheel
receives is only meant to help the driver
realize optimal steering behavior in order to
reach/maintain vehicle stability. The only
notification the driver receives that the feature is
active, is the torque applied to the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through small
torques on the steering wheel, which means the
effectiveness of the DST feature is highly
dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall
reaction to the applied torque. It is very important
to realize that this feature will not steer the vehicle,
meaning the driver is still responsible for steering
the vehicle.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent collisions, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The EBD function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
entering the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, striking
objects or other vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
path does not match the intended path, ESC
applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when the TCS is active. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to
flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible.
Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence the
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM
cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs,
especially those that involve leaving the roadway
or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's safety
or the safety of others.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the
ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes
should only be used for specific reasons as noted
in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road condi-
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to
inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle, and
may negatively affect the performance of the
ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
suspension, braking system, tire type and size
or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte-
nance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting off
in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable
to allow more wheel spin. This can be accom-
plished by momentarily pushing the ESC OFF
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode.
Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light in the instrument cluster will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode. It should go out with the
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
that the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
is in a reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on
momentarily each time the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be on even if it was
turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a
short period.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
described in the TCS section) has been
disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
If the driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for
HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)
gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-
mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
Ú page 148.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking situation
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake
Control (EBC) system will prepare the brake system
for a panic stop.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It
is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people,
and objects, and most importantly brake
operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
may not be enough brake pressure to hold
both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision or serious personal injury.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
the front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS
is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to
provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similarly to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more vehicle torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow
the trailer tongue weight recommendations
Ú page 136.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
and enters standby mode when the vehicle is in
PARK (P).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one
lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.7 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rearview mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these
areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There-
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a
lane change. If the trailer or other object
(i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond
the side of your vehicle, this may result in false
detections. The BSM warning light may even
remain illuminated the entire time the vehicle is
in a forward gear Ú page 148.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of the
side mirror warning indicator lamps when a
motorcycle or any small object remains at the
side of the vehicle for extended periods of time
(more than a couple of seconds).
The BSM system can become blocked if snow, ice,
mud, or other road contaminations accumulate on
the rear fascia/bumper where the radar sensors
are located. The system may also detect blockage
if the vehicle is operated in areas with extremely
low radar returns such as a desert or parallel to a
large elevation drop. If blockage is detected, a
“Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe Rear
Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP
alerts will not occur. This is normal operation. The
system will automatically recover and resume
function when the condition clears. To minimize
system blockage, do not block the area of the rear
fascia/bumper where the radar sensors are
located with foreign objects (bumper stickers,
bicycle racks, etc.) and keep it clear of road
contaminations.
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
light located in the outside mirrors in addition to
sounding an audible (chime) alert and reducing the
radio volume Ú page 204.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
three different entry points (side, rear, front) while
driving to see if an alert is necessary. The BSM
system will issue an alert during these types of
zone entries.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on
either side and enter the rear detection zone with
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle
remains in the blind spot for approximately
1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert
on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts,
walls, foliage, berms, snow banks, car washes, etc.
However, occasionally the system may alert on
such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle
in adjacent lanes Ú page 342.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to objects
moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
(32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE (R),
the driver is alerted using both the visual and
audible alarms, including reducing the radio
volume.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
The BSM system is not designed to detect
pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver. Additionally, if your vehicle is obscured by a
flat object on one side the system can false alert
on vehicles approaching from the opposite
direction.
Blind Spot Modes
Three selectable modes of operation are available
in the Uconnect system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only — Default Setting
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object.
However, when the system is operating in Rear
Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in
the appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then activated,
and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be
sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected
object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio
(if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts when a
detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio is also muted.
Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
vehicle is started the previously stored mode
will be recalled and used.
The BSM system can work in conjunction with
the KeySense function of the vehicle (if
equipped) Ú page 93.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings and limited braking
are intended to provide the driver with enough time
to react, avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a
driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a parking
lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you,
and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 204
SAFETY 205
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide
a limited level of active braking to help slow the
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and
the system determines that the driver intends to
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate
and provide additional brake force as required.
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h), the system may provide
the maximum braking possible to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision
Warning with Mitigation event stops the vehicle
completely, the system will hold the vehicle at
standstill for two seconds and then release the
brakes. If a pedestrian is encountered in the path
at the same speed threshold, the system will also
attempt to bring the vehicle to a stop.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the
vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the
warning message will be deactivated Ú page 342.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or sign
posts based on the course prediction. This is
expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent
such misuse of the system, after four Active
Braking events within a key cycle, the Active
Braking portion of FCW will be deactivated until
the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
Turning FCW On Or Off
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect Settings.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows the
system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
detect every type of potential collision. The driver
has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
Failure to follow this warning could lead to
serious injury or death.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 205
206 SAFETY
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned
off, it will remain off when the vehicle is
restarted.
FCW can work in conjunction with the KeySense
function of the vehicle (if equipped) Ú page 93.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 148.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the driver
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies
autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warning when the latter is at a farther
distance than the “Medium” setting. This provides
the most reaction time to avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front when the distance
between the vehicle in the front is much closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event of
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the
audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential
frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected
by the driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading
vehicles with the same or higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance is
no longer present, the system will return to its full
performance state. If the problem persists, see an
authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 206
SAFETY 207
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
The Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is a
subsystem of the FCW system that provides the
driver with audible and visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display, and may apply
automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 37 mph
(60 km/h), the system may provide braking to
mitigate the potential collision with a pedestrian.
If the PEB event stops the vehicle completely, the
system will hold the vehicle at a standstill for two
seconds and then release the brakes. When the
system determines a collision with the pedestrian
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision
with the pedestrian.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display
in the Controls settings Ú page 148.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button once.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the
Pedestrian Emergency Braking button again.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the
system, so no warning or active braking will be
available in case of a possible frontal collision with
the pedestrian.
NOTE:
The PEB system will NOT retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut down. The
system will reset to the default setting when the
vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active
road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color, or the Uconnect radio will display a
TPMS message. When this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the TPMS
Warning Light to turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C).
This means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle
is driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
See Ú page 319 for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can
PEB detect every type of potential collision with
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 207
208 SAFETY
(Continued)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure
warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the
low tire pressure warning (TPMS Warning Light)
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the
ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the
measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a
temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the
tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is low enough to turn on the
TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be
on. In this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off only after the tires are inflated to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value Ú page 342.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the tire
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended
that you take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer to have your sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the TPMS
sensor.
CAUTION!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 208
SAFETY 209
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
rate tire pressure gauge, even if underinflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination
of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses
wireless technology with wheel rim mounted
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the
receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
SERVICE TPMS WARNING
When a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system
fault no longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare — If Equipped
1. The compact spare tire does not have a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of
a road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, the “Inflate to XX”
message will continue to be displayed. Upon
the next ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster
will still display a different color pressure
value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
value.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 209
210 SAFETY
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the instrument cluster will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the
compact spare, the TPMS will update automat-
ically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off and the graphic in the instrument
cluster will display a new pressure value
instead of dashes (--), as long as no tire
pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM LOW
PRESSURE WARNINGS
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in
the instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument cluster
graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value as shown in the "Inflate to
XX" message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update,
the pressure values in the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to their original color,
and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
TPMS DEACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
be deactivated if replacing all four wheel and tire
assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display dashes (--) in place of
the pressure values.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 210
SAFETY 211
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure
values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passengers
as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
position Ú page 234.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 234.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt
behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with
your child restraint to make sure that you are
using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow the
front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully
into the space between occupants and the
door and occupants could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person,
see Ú page 339 for customer service contact
information.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 211
212 SAFETY
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
even on short trips. Someone on the road may be
a poor driver and could cause a collision that
includes you. This can happen far away from home
or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert
feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied).
The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
(Continued)
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when the outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an
animal or other items are placed on the outboard
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat
(if equipped). It is recommended that pets be
restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until the driver and outboard
front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
with you under normal conditions. However, in a
collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you
can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be
sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear their
seat belts whether or not an air bag is also
provided at their seating position to minimize
the risk of severe injury or death in the event
of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder
belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
WARNING!
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk
of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap
part of your seat belt as low as possible and
keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized
dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest
you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision. You
are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
collision, or if you have questions regarding
seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front and second row outboard seats the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or
downward to position the seat belt away from your
neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to
the position that serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
(Continued)
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature
allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted
in the upward position without pushing or
squeezing the release button. To verify the
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked
into position.
Second Row Center (If Equipped) And Third
Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center (if equipped) and third row
center seat belts feature a seat belt with a
mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat
belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat
is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate can then be stored out of the way in the
headliner for added convenience to open up
utilization of the storage areas behind the front
seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch
plate from its stowed position in the headliner
slightly behind the second or third row seat.
Mini-Latch Stowage
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt
over the seat.
Mini-Latch Plate
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the left
head restraint.
Routing The Rear Seat Belt Latch Plate
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt
in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that
it is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2 — Seat Belt Buckle
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the
mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the
mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its
stowed position.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not
properly connected when the seat belt is used
by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to
provide proper restraint and will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch
plate and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and
reattach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
is LESS than 6 inches.
WARNING!
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
when the lap belt is not long enough and only
use in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be
replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child
restraint system Ú page 245.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
each seating position.
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped with
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
restraint is installed in a seating position that has
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old
and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the
Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to
the procedures in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
belt or children who are using booster seats.
The locked mode is only used to install
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
that have a harness for restraining the child.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with
a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier
access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes
with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide
the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap
portion of the belt and install the car seat normally.
When the car seat is removed from the vehicle,
slide the latch plate above the park stitch to enable
occupants to latch the seat belt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used
to hold the seat belt out of the path of the power
folding third row seat. Only place the seat belt
webbing in this clip while folding and opening the
seat. Do not leave the webbing behind the clip
when using the belt to restrain an occupant.
Third Row Stow Clip
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag
System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
WARNING!
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be
positioned properly on the occupant and they
could be more seriously injured in an accident
as a result.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the air bag system whenever the
ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system
that may deploy the air bag system even if the
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected
prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check,
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after
initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the
four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In
this condition the air bags may not be ready to
inflate for your protection. Have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate on the instrument panel. The
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately Ú page 101.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
light does not come on as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system
provides output appropriate to the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front air bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort-
ably extending your arms to reach the steering
wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System (OCS)
that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage
by themselves are not good indicators of whether
or not an air bag should have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate
and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air
bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
of a Federally regulated safety system for this
vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the
occupant’s seated weight, as determined by the
OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the
air bag on the instrument panel or steering
wheel because any such objects could cause
harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You
may damage the air bags and you could be
injured because the air bags may no longer be
functional. The protective covers for the air
bag cushions are designed to open only when
the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even
though you have air bags.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam.
Any weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
if the OCS estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the ORC.
The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback and
the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small
adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects. The
OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an
adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an object
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of
the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS
to properly classify the seated weight of a front seat
passenger, the OCS components must function as
designed. Do not make any modifications to the
front passenger seat components, assembly, or to
the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion
needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly
or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
or cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the
specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the
vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) component or SRS related compo-
nent or fastener be modified or replaced with any
part except those which are approved by
FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide
an output signal to the OCS that is different
from the occupant’s properly seated weight
input. This may result in serious injury or death
in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position, your
back against the seatback, sitting upright,
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, which may result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from
working properly, which may result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any
objects on the floor under the front passenger
seat.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees
of the driver and front passenger, and position the
front occupants for improved interaction with the
front air bags.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in
the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags
provide enhanced protection during a frontal
impact by working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the
outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
injury during certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the seat
belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
the space between the occupant and the door. The
SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force that it could injure occupants if they are
not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos,
citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
serious injury.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response
to impact events. The system is calibrated to
deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or
other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering
above the side windows where the SABIC and
its deployment path are located should
remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do
not install any accessory items in your vehicle
which could alter the roof. Do not add an after-
market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add
roof racks that require permanent attach-
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events. The
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
is appropriate, based on the severity and type of
collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event may
be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is
appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy
the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
side windows in certain rollover or side impact
events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appro-
priate) are necessary for your protection in all
collisions. They also help keep you in position,
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly and
sit upright with their backs against the seats.
Children must be properly restrained in a child
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
WARNING!
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme-
diately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal
by-product of the process that generates the
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These
airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If
the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these
particles settle on your clothing, follow the
garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the following
functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(if equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any
of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
(Continued)
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to
the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key
from the ignition switch to avoid draining the
battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in
the engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel
leaks in the engine compartment and on the
ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You
could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the front
fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
aftermarket side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
who works on your vehicle that it has an air
bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden-
tally or may not function properly if modifica-
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
necessary to modify the air bag system for
persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
ating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However,
other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
crash statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost
large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check
the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you
have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read
and follow all the instructions and warnings in the
child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the
labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that
it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable
Safety Standards. You should also make sure that
you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers
or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
to hold even an infant on your lap could become
so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
the child’s size.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth
until they reach the weight or height limit of the
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle.
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less
than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or
height allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of
the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of
the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious injury
to a child 12 years or younger, including a
child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have
outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children
should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the highest
weight or height allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
the child’s back is against the seatback, they
should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear
support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this
vehicle is not designed to manage the crash
forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the
support leg may not function as it was designed
by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may
be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
a collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
or rearward because it can loosen the child
restraint attachments. Remove the child
restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure
it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
their back is against the seatback, should use the
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s
seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is
still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole
trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death.
A child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are
two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
position.
These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat
belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to
install the child restraint. Please see the following
table for more information.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat LATCH Positions
7 Passenger Quad Seating LATCH Positions
(Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(Two Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(Two Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(Two Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage
system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row
Stow 'n Go head restraints are not removable. The
3rd row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head restraints
are not removable Ú page 45.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Seating
LATCH Anchorages (Second Row Anchorages Shown)
8 Passenger Seating
LATCH Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorages Shown)
7 Passenger Bench Seating
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
located behind all second row seating
positions. The third row has a tether
anchor on the 40% seat for the right
outboard position and in the center of the 60%
seat for either the center or left outboard seating
position. All tether anchorages are located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row Bench Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Second Row 8 Passenger Anchorage Shown)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Third Row 60/40 Anchorage Shown)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
Center Seat LATCH
This vehicle has 4 lower LATCH anchorages in the
third row, rear seat. Anchorages A and B are used
for the right outboard position behind the front
passenger (1). Anchorages C and D are used for
the center seating position (2). The left outboard
position (3) does not have lower anchorages. Do
not
install a child restraint using anchorages B and
C. This is not a LATCH position in your vehicle.
Center Seat LATCH Positions
If a child restraint installed in the center position
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not
install a child seat in that outboard position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow
the seat belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 245 to check what type of seat belt each
seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap of the child seat so that
you can more easily attach the hooks or
connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child
seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 249 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the
seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
WARNING!
Use anchorages C and D to install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint in the center
seating position (2). Do not install a
LATCH-compatible child restraint using
anchorages B and C. This is not a
LATCH-compatible position in your vehicle.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. Please
see Ú page 244 for typical installation
instructions.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
being used by other occupants or being used to
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
portion of the seat belt tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 219 for additional information on ALR.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the
restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
7 Passenger Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations
7 Passenger Quad Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Locations (Includes Stow ‘n Go)
8 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint interferes with the installation of the child restraint, the head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed in
front of it.
Frequently Asked Questions
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child
restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up
to the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The 2nd row head restraints on bench and the
center head restraint in the 8 passenger vehicle
can be removed if they interfere with the
installation of the child restraint. 2nd row Stow 'n
Go head restraints are not removable. The 3rd
row center head restraint is removable in all
vehicles, but the 3rd row outboard head
restraints are not removable Ú page 45.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
with an ALR retractor.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in
the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder
part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then,
allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat
step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used by
an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 249 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Seat Belt Park Stitch — If Equipped
The rear outboard seat belts may be equipped with
a park stitch to raise the latch plate for easier
access to occupants. If the park stitch interferes
with the tight installation of a child restraint, slide
the latch plate over the stitching to shorten the lap
portion of the belt and install the car seat following
the steps above. When the car seat is removed
from the vehicle, slide the latch plate above the
park stitch to enable occupants to latch the
seatbelt securely.
Seat Belt Park Stitch Location
If the park stitch interferes with the lock-off
features of the child restraint, do not use the
lock-off feature. Instead, switch the seat belt to the
locking mode, as described in the steps above or
move the car seat to a different seating position.
Seat Belt Park Stitch
Installing Child Restraints Using the Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 238 for the
location of approved tether anchorages in your
vehicle.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move the
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 2nd Row Bench
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 2nd Row 8 Passenger
Top Tether Anchorage Locations — 3rd Row
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Strap Attachment
(Second Row 7 Passenger Stow ‘n Go Anchorage Shown)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
Third Row Tether Attachment
The tether anchorage found on the back of the
60% seat in the third row may be used by either the
left outboard or the center seating position. Only
tether one child restraint to the tether anchorage
at a time.
To connect the tether strap hook to the tether
anchorage for either seating position on the 60%
third row seat:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat.
2. If the car seat is in the center, raise the center
head restraint and route the tether strap
around the inboard (left) side of the head
restraint support posts, as shown in the
diagram.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Center Tether Attachment – 3rd Row
Outboard Tether Attachments – 3rd Row
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
position directly behind the child seat to
secure a child restraint top tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not connect the tether strap for more than
one child restraint to the tether anchorage on
the 60% seat in the third row. This anchorage is
intended for one child restraint at a time.
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you
have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first placed in the ON/RUN mode. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system inspected
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System
has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 211.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
place the blower control on high speed. You should
be able to feel the air directed against the
windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install
your floor mat upside down or turn your floor
mat over. Lightly pull to confirm mat is
secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT
FROM THE VEHICLE before installing any
other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an
additional floor mat on top of an existing floor
mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer-
ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the
engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the
brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to
check for interference. If your floor mat inter-
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
into the driver’s side floor area when the
vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could
change the position of the floor mat and may
cause interference with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
each pedal to check for interference with the
accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and
water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
always check your floor mat has been properly
installed and is secured to your vehicle using
the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should
be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an
authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust
system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts.
Open seams or loose connections could permit
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
system each time the vehicle is raised for
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
the engine running, adjust your heating or
cooling controls to force outside air into the
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
an open area with the engine running for more
than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system
inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
Have any abnormal conditions repaired
promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 254
255
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located in
the lower center area of the instrument panel.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the button
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers
may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an SOS
and ASSIST button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber Ú page 342.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if
you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes
as a built in function. Other Uconnect services
will only be operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™
service is active and you are connected to an
operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 255
256 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you
will be connected to a representative for assis-
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle is being driven and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
Uconnect Customer Care - Total support for
Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button
on the Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the
Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system
may transmit the following important vehicle
information to a SOS operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system to
determine if additional assistance is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed.
Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS operator
until the SOS operator terminates the
connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 256
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 257
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between the
SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously illumi-
nate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road
conditions or location), do not wait for voice
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable network and GPS antennas. You
could prevent operable network and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an
emergency call. To avoid interference that can
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
WARNING!
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 257
258 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These
include, but are not limited to, the following
factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail-
able or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network conges-
tion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is
required for the SOS Call system to function
properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean
you will not have SOS Call services. If the
Rearview Mirror light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the SOS Call system
immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the Occupant Restraint Control system
immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 258
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 259
(Continued)
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
can immediately connect you with help in the event
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING —
IF EQUIPPED
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid
ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Place the ignition in OFF mode.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or changing
the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack.
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 259
260 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACK AND SPARE TIRE LOCATION
The jacking tools, spare tire and portable air
compressor (if equipped) or tire service kit (if
equipped) are stowed behind an access panel on
the left hand side of the vehicle.
Jacking Equipment Location
EQUIPMENT REMOVAL
1. Remove the access panel to the jacking
equipment.
2. Unlatch the Portable Air Compressor or Tire
Service Kit if equipped. Unscrew the wing nut
that is holding the Inflatable Spare Tire and
gently remove it from the storage area.
Remove wrench from foam tray.
NOTE:
Depending on the trim level of the vehicle, the
options for spare tire equipment may vary.
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
Jacking Equipment
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Tire Service Kit
3 — Wrench
4 — Fuel Filler Funnel
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
1 — Inflatable Spare Tire
2 — Portable Air Compressor
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 260
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 261
(Continued)
3. Remove Jack by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise to collapse from storage
area that is located behind the tire.
Jack Location
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
Jack Warning Label
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel
to be raised.
Do not let any passenger sit in the vehicle
when it is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING!
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 261
262 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Detailed information about the inflatable spare
tire, its use, and operation can be found on
Ú page 324.
Extending The Wrench
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left, one turn while
the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations on
each side of the vehicle body. These locations
are on the sill flange of the vehicle body.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations
are critical. See the following images for proper
jacking locations.
Jack Locations Front Lifting Point
Front Jack Location
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on
you. You could be crushed. Never get any part of
your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 262
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 263
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
3. Place the wrench on the jack screw and turn
clockwise until the jack head is properly
engaged in the described location.
Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the swivel wrench. Raise the
vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface
and enough clearance is obtained to install the
compact spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug nuts, for vehicles with
wheel covers, remove the cover from the
wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel cover off.
Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the inflatable spare on the vehicle,
located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle.
Mounting Inflatable Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle
only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the inflatable spare tire with
the valve stem facing outward. The vehicle could
be damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 263
264 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the inflatable
spare tire.
7. Leave the vehicle on the jack and start
inflating the inflatable spare after the tire has
been mounted to the vehicle. Secure the
wheel to the hub by tightening the nuts with
the wrench. After inflation, once the vehicle is
lowered you will have a second opportunity to
“torque” the lug nuts Ú page 333.
8. Inflate the tire to the prescribed pressure
60 psi (4.2 Bar) using the Portable Air
Compressor Ú page 265 or Tire Service Kit if
equipped Ú page 267.
9. Lower the vehicle once the inflatable Spare
has reached its pressure and the
compressor-hose has been removed from the
tire valve.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice Ú page 333. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
11. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
12. Place the deflated (flat) tire and foam tray
cover assembly in the rear cargo area.
Do not
stow the deflated tire in the inflatable spare
tire location. Have the full-sized tire repaired or
replaced, as soon as possible.
13. Stow the jack back in the stowage
compartment and place the access panel
back. The stud of the storage area must be
threaded through the lower part of the jack.
Then turn the Jack Screw clockwise to secure
it in place.
NOTE:
Stow the foam tray and components in the cargo
area.
Storing The Jack
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel
wheels with wheel covers, install two lug nuts
on the mounting studs which are on each side
of the valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced
immediately.
1 — Jack Screw
2 — Jack
3 — Stud
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 264
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 265
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with
the valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover
by hand, snapping the cover over the two lug
nuts. Do not use a hammer or excessive force
to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten all the lug nuts until the wheel
sits flush onto the hub and there is no play. The
nuts will have to be fully tightened once the
vehicle is lowered.
Tightening an improperly seated wheel under
vehicle load can damage the threads, cause
vibration, and undermine safety.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle for
increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. Details for proper wheel lug nut torque
Ú page 333. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a service
station.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Portable Air
Compressor. Use the Portable Air Compressor
located in the side compartment of the cargo area
to inflate the inflatable tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar).
Portable Air Compressor
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Road Tire
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Wheel Lug Nut
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury.
1 — Power Plug
2 — Deflation Button
3 — Pressure Gauge
4 — Power Button
5 — Air Hose
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 265
266 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Portable Air Compressor Usage With Inflatable
Spare Tire
1. Remove the Portable Air Compressor from the
storage location.
2. Raise the vehicle as described in
the Jacking Instructions within this
section.
3. Install the Inflatable Spare tire as
described in the Jack Instructions
section in this manual. Make sure
that the valve stem is located near
the ground, and then screw the air hose of the
Portable Air Compressor to the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and connect
it the vehicles 12 Volt power Outlet.
5. Always start the engine before
turning ON the Portable Air
Compressor.
6. Switch the power button ON.
7. Inflate the tire to 60 psi (4.2 Bar)
recommended as per the label on
the wheel or if the vehicle equipped
with the inflatable spare tire
pressure indicated on the Tire and Loading
information label located on the driver-side
door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire is overinflated, use the deflation button
to reduce the tire air pressure.
8. After the tire reaches the
recommended pressure, lower the
vehicle with the jack as described in
the Jack Instructions section in this
manual.
9. Remove the speed limit label
sticker from the Portable Air
Compressor and place it on the
center of the steering wheel.
10. Return the Portable Air Compressor to the
foam tray and secure it with the strap. Store
the foam tray in the cargo area.
RETURN INFLATABLE SPARE TIRE
To return Inflatable Spare Tire to its storage
location.
1. Return the Jack.
2. Deflate the spare tire. Use the Tire Service Kit
or Portable Air Compressor Ú page 265 and
push the deflation button to do this step. See
the Portable Air Compressor in this section for
additional information. The inflatable spare
tire will return to its original shape.
3. Install the inflatable spare tire back into its
original stowage location and position facing
outward.
4. Install the foam tray with wrench and funnel
installed.
5. Install and tighten the wing nut by hand.
6. Install the Tire Service Kit or Portable Air
Compressor (if equipped) and tighten the
strap.
7. Install access panel door.
WARNING!
Do not lift or carry the Portable Air Compressor
by the hose.
Always stow the Portable Air Compressor only
in the provided place.
The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get
hot after use, so it should be handled care-
fully.
Keep the Portable Air Compressor away from
open flames or heat source.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 266
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 267
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Service
Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be
removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used
in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is secured with a strap and is
stored in the storage bin located behind the rear
cargo trim panel.
Tire Service Kit Location
Tire Service Kit
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce
the air pressure in the tire if it
becomes overinflated.
1 — Sealant/Air Hose
2 — Hose Accessories
3 — Mode Select Knob
4 — Pressure Gauge
5 — Deflation Button
6 — Power Switch
7 — Sealant Bottle
8 — Power Plug
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 267
268 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle prior
to the expiration date (printed at the lower right
hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. See the
Sealant Bottle Replacement in this section for
further information.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application use
and needs to be replaced after each use. Always
replace these components immediately at your
original equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will remove
the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once the sealant dries, it can
easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the valve
stem on the wheel is free of debris before
connecting the Tire Service Kit.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to
seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread/contact surface of your
vehicle’s tires.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is not intended to
seal punctures on the tires' side walls.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two
needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump and
make sure the Mode Select Knob is in the Air
Mode when inflating such items to avoid
injecting sealant into them.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is approxi-
mately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving on
a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames
or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire
Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passen-
gers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes,
or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful
if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the
skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irrita-
tion. Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change
clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
WARNING!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 268
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 269
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near to
the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit
Hose to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when injecting
the sealant into the deflated tire and running
the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects
(e.g., screws or nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to
the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button,
the sealant (white fluid) will flow from
the Sealant Bottle through the
Sealant Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire Service
Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant Hose from the
valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free
of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose to the
valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob
is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle,
if available. Make sure the vehicle is running
before turning the Tire Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of
water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
WARNING!
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 269
270 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure
Gauge can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly
from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle
is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the
Sealant Bottle is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire
to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the
tire and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening. Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or
is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn the
Tire Service Kit off.
2. Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire
Service Kit in the vehicle storage location.
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and
inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant
within the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the
ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hose
to reach the valve stem and keep the Tire
Service Kit flat on the ground. This will provide
the best positioning of the kit when injecting the
sealant into the deflated tire and running the air
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place
the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
Place the transmission in PARK (P) and cycle the
ignition in the OFF position.
Apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced after using the Tire Service Kit. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around
you. Have the tire checked as soon as possible
at an authorized dealer.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 270
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 271
If tire has improper inflation, see the following
steps:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove the
cap from the fitting at the end of the hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and then
screw the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose
onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt
power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto the
valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on
Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to
the cold tire inflation pressure found
on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Deflation
Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve
stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and
unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage
area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been
sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Hose Location
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 271
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a
battery in another vehicle or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
dangerous if done improperly so please follow the
procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack follow
the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located on the left
side of the engine compartment.
Battery Location
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
occur.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
NOTE:
The positive battery post may be covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to
the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses.
Only jump directly off positive post which has a
positive
(+) symbol on or around the post.
Battery Post Locations
See the following steps to prepare for jump
starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and place the
ignition to OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective cover
over the remote positive
(+) battery post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and make
sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive
(+)
post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive
(+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be
injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster
vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 273
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative
(-) post
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the
discharge vehicle) near the windshield cowl.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
necting procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive
(+) post of the booster
battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+)
jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post
of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and charging
system inspected at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel
Ú page 260 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, insert the refueling funnel into the filler
neck opening. Take care to open both flappers with
the funnel to avoid spills.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on
the fuel door to break the ice buildup and
re-release the fuel door using the inside release
button. Do not pry on the door.
Refueling Funnel
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the battery
to explode and could result in personal injury.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling
with a gas can.
See the following steps for refueling:
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
the fuel nozzle.
Inserting Funnel
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper
doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce
the potential for overheating by taking the
appropriate action.
On the highway — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling
system and turning the A/C off can help remove
this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the
blower control to high. This allows the heater core
to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in
removing heat from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
You could be burned. Always place fuel
containers on the ground while filling.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
To move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
available.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
Follow These Steps To Activate The Manual Park
Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the Manual Park Release access
cover, which is to the lower left of the steering
column.
4. The Manual Park Release access cover is
connected to a red tether strap. Pull the tether
strap out as far as it will go, then release it. The
transmission should now be in NEUTRAL (N),
allowing the vehicle to be moved.
Tether Strap
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
If you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator
has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the
pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
maintain control of the vehicle before activating
the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should
apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if
it is not secured or properly connected to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
the tether will remain outside of the trim panel and
the access cover cannot be reinstalled.
5. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the tether strap out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position.
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully
and re-install the access cover. If the access
cover cannot be re-installed, repeat
steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE
(R) while gently pressing the accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or
less. Whenever the transmission remains in
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you must
press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial Off”
mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 196.
Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF
switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and
tires. A tire could explode and injure someone.
Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when
you are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
fast may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
Towing Condition Wheel OFF The Ground ALL MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
ACCEPTABLE METHOD
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle (if
rear wheels are on the ground), to avoid inadver-
tent Electric Park Brake (EPB) engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled
via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery or total elec-
trical failure when the Electric Park Brake (EPB)
is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or jack to
raise the rear wheels off the ground when
moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the
ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE:
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed.
Vehicle Recovery Tow Points
Your vehicle is equipped with Vehicle Recovery
Points that can be used to recover a disabled
vehicle, located on the underbody of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Ensure that the towing service tow hooks are
properly seated and secured in the attachment
points.
This recovery tow feature should be used by a
trained professional only.
Use approved receptacle location to free the
disabled vehicle from its environment.
Front Recovery Points
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
NOTE:
The Safehold feature will engage the Electric Park
Brake whenever the driver's door is opened (if the
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK, and
brake pedal is released). If you are towing this
vehicle with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you
must manually disable the Electric Park Brake
each time the driver's door is opened, by pressing
the brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery
is discharged, detailed instructions on shifting the
transmission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle Ú page 276.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 232.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 233.
CAUTION!
Recovery feature:
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle
over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Is to be used by a professional ONLY.
Is used only to provide recovery of the vehicle.
Is NOT to be used to recover secondary
vehicle.
Is NOT to be used for transporting the vehicle
over the road, i.e. “Flat Towing”.
Recovery load should:
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
Be applied at constant speed.
Be applied parallel to the center line of the
length of the vehicle.
Not be an abrupt acceleration.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may
result from improper towing.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while being
towed.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 280
281
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator
system will remind you that it is time to take your
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips,
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures will influence when the “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed
by someone other than an authorized dealer
Ú page 92.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet
customers.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear
or damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irreg-
ular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indi-
cator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir
and brake master cylinder, fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior lights
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 281
282 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plans for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air cleaner filter
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 282
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 283
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, boot seals, tie rod ends, and replace
if necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive tensioner, idler pulley, and
replace if necessary
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace cabin air filter X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs
1
X
Replace the front accessory drive belt X
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 283
284 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first
X X
Replace PCV valve X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could
cause an accident.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 284
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 285
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 8 — Windshield Washer Reservoir Cap
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 285
286 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine
is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the
MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil
level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Windshield Washer Fluid Cap
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a
few seconds to flush out the residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel, and
wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade
performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture
that meets or exceeds the temperature range of
your climate. This rating information can be found
on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free
battery. You will never have to add water, and
periodic maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 286
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 287
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in
civil penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or
on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water Ú page 272.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not
use a booster battery or any other booster
source with an output greater than 12 Volts.
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each
other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is attached
to the positive post and the negative cable is
attached to the negative post. Battery posts
are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and
are identified on the battery case. Cable
clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is
in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery
cables before connecting the charger to the
battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper
equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
to a competent mechanic.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 287
288 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils that
are API Certified and meet the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has been
certified by the API. The manufacturer
only recommends API Certified engine
oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals for
oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
the addition of any additives (other than leak
detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
problem to the environment. Contact an
authorized dealer, service station or governmental
agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
certified filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 282.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as
the chemicals can damage your engine. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 288
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 289
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified
filters should be used.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of a belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are
not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks
running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any
belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also, have the belt replaced if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords, or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated
from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking
(cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation).
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools; we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive
belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be
injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equip-
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a
competent mechanic.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 289
290 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized
dealer at the start of each warm season. This
service should include cleaning of the condenser
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension
should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended that
air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove all contents from the glove
compartment.
Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
air conditioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information located online, for further
warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines
to be disconnected should be done by an
experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter
removed and the blower operating, the blower
can contact hands and may propel dirt and
debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether Clip
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 290
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 291
2. Open the glove compartment door partially,
leaving extra slack on the glove compartment
tension tether. Detach the glove compartment
tension tether by sliding the black tension
tether clip down, and popping it out of the slot
on the side of the glove compartment door.
3. There are glove compartment travel stops on
either side of the glove compartment door. To
release them, push inward on each travel stop,
and pull the glove compartment door down
until the travel stops pass clear of their
hooking points.
4. Open the glove compartment door as far as
possible to gain access to the cabin air filter
compartment cover.
Cabin Air Filter Compartment Cover
5. Pry up the lid of each individual compartment
snap, and detach it from the rest of the snap.
There is a small space on the side of each
snap to use for separating the lid from the
snap. Once detached, remove the rest of the
snap completely from the compartment cover.
6. After removing the snaps, lift up the
compartment cover to gain access to the fresh
air inlet.
Fresh Air Inlet
7. Remove the filter cover by prying back each of
the retaining tabs from their hooking points,
and then pulling the filter cover out to expose
the cabin air filter. Remove the air filter by
pulling it straight out of the housing.
8. Install the new air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor.
9. Once the filter is replaced, reinstall the filter
cover, making sure the retaining tabs are fully
secured into their housings.
10. Close the cabin air filter compartment cover,
and reinsert the snaps into their slots. Push
the snap lids until fully attached.
11. Push the glove compartment door to the near
closed position to reengage the glove
compartment travel stops. Finally, pull the
glove compartment tension tether clip down
and slide it back into the slot on the side of the
glove compartment door.
1 — Compartment Cover
2 — Compartment Snap
1 — Filter Cover
2 — Retaining Tabs
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result in
the need to replace it more often.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 291
292 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically. Use
a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given
to hood latching components to ensure proper
function. When performing other underhood
services, the hood latch release mechanism, and
safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. If chat-
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots are present,
clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit.
Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that
is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 292
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 293
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade
and while holding the wiper arm with one
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the
wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the
wiper arm with one hand and separating the
wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
hand (move the wiper blade toward the right
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade
from the wiper arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 293
294 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
grasp the bottom end of the wiper blade
nearest to wiper arm with your right hand. With
your left hand hold the wiper arm as you pull
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past
its stop far enough to unsnap the wiper blade
pivot pin from the receptacle on the end of the
wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and away
from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the
glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 294
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 295
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is unsnapped
first. Attempting to fully raise the rear wiper arm
without unsnapping the wiper arm pivot cap may
damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,
and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper
arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and snap
the wiper arm pivot cap back into place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
technician inspect the complete exhaust system
and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to
ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing CO, Ú page 252 for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
grass or leaves, and those items come into
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park
or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can
burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an
emissions control device and may seriously
reduce engine performance and cause
serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if
your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. In the event of engine malfunction,
particularly involving engine misfire or other
apparent loss of performance, have your
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera-
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction
could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter
and vehicle.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 295
296 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
tune-up to the manufacturer specifications, should
be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the
transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
nents disconnected or removed, such as when
diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
ating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle
rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system
please contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from
under the hood, do not open the hood until the
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a
cooling system pressure cap when the radi-
ator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may
start at any time, whether the engine is
running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni-
tion to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the igni-
tion is in the ON mode.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 282.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 337.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
engine coolant, may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
engine coolant is different and should not be
mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
gency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust
inhibitors or anti-rust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not
recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be
used up to ten years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important that you use the same engine coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout
the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using
OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of
the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations
(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures
below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/engine
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in the
area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) as soon as possible.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank
(if equipped).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
is any accumulation of foreign material on the
sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal.
Check with your local authorities to determine the
disposal rules for your community. To prevent
ingestion by animals or children, do not store
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground.
If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold, the
level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should
be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on
the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant
bottle. Do not overfill.
See an authorized dealer for service.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
meters of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment.
This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon
dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure
tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro-
sion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never
add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Heat causes pressure to build-up in the
cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
(Continued)
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep
the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces-
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat.
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all
brake system components should be inspected
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 282.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services or
immediately if the Brake Warning Light is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area
before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to
bring the fluid level up to the requirements
described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
checked when pads are replaced. However, low
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer recommended brake fluid
Ú page 338.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in
abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You
would not have your full braking capacity in an
emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer recommended brake
fluid Ú page 338. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
all times. Brake fluid in a open container
absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts,
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its
contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam-
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
could be damaged, causing partial or
complete brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
WARNING!
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
using any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
engineered product and its performance may be
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do
not add any fluid additives to the transmission.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked.
Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level
can cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
to ensure optimum transmission performance and
life. Use only the manufacturer specified
transmission fluid Ú page 338. It is important to
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
mission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
FUSES
General Information
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage your
transmission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than
manufacturer recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
torque converter shudder Ú page 338.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an
appropriate replacement fuse with the same
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or
any other material. Do not place a fuse inside
a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check the
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located in
the engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, mini-fuses,
micro-fuses, circuit breakers and relays. A label
that identifies each component is printed on the
inside of the cover.
Before any procedure is done on the PDC, make
sure engine is turned off.
Remove the cover by unlatching the two locks
located at each side of the PDC cover, avoid the
usage of screw drivers or any other tool to remove
the cover, since they may apply excessive force
and result in a broken/damaged part.
After service is done, secure the cover with its two
locks.
NOTE:
The function and amperage of these fuses are
different, depending on vehicle trim level and
content.
Power Distribution Center
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
WARNING!
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F06 – – Not Used
F07 – 25 Amp Clear Ignition Coil/Fuel Injector
F08 – – Not Used
F09 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier/Active Noise Control *
F10 – – Not Used
F11 – – Not Used
F12 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor (IBS)
F13 – 10 Amp Red ECM (ESS Only) *
F14 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F15 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #3 (Power Locks)
F16 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F17 30 Amp Pink – Starter
F18 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #1)
F19 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seats Solenoid LT *
F20 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F21 25 Amp Clear – 2nd Row Folding Seat Solenoid RT *
F22 – – Not Used
F23 – – Not used
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow RR Wiper
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
F25A – 10 Amp Red
Handsfree LT & RT RR Door Release
Mod *
F25B – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter/ PWR Mirror *
F26 40 Amp Green – Front HVAC Blower Motor
F27 25 Amp Clear – RR Slide Door Module-RT *
F28A – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Report
F28B – 10 Amp Red USB + AUX Port / Video USB Port
F29 – – Not Used
F30A – 15 Amp Blue Media HUB 1&2 *
F30B – 15 Amp Blue PWR Lumbar SW *
F31 – – Not Used
F32 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F33 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module *
F34 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-LT *
F35 25 Amp Clear – Sunroof Control Module *
F36 – – Not Used
F37 40 Amp Green – CBC Feed #4 (Exterior Lighting #2)
F38 60 Amp Yellow – Vacuum Cleaner *
F39 25 Amp Clear – Rear HVAC Blower Motor
F40 – – Not Used
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F41 – – Not Used
F42 40 Amp Green – Folding Seat Module *
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F44 30 Amp Pink – CBC Feed #1 (Interior Lights)
F45 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter *
F46 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F47 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F48 – – Not Used
F49 25 Amp Clear – RR Sliding Door Module-LT *
F50 25 Amp Clear – RR Door Module-RT *
F51 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper
F52 30 Amp Pink – Brake Vacuum Pump
F53 – – Not Used
F54 40 Amp Green – ESP-ECU And Valves
F55A – 15 Amp Blue
Radio Frequency HUB/ Keyless
Ignition System (KIN) / (Electronic
Steering Lock-BUX ONLY) *
F55B – 15 Amp Blue DVD / Video Routing Module (VRM) *
F56A – 10 Amp Red
Front and Rear HVAC Control Module
/ Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Electronic Steering Lock (ESL)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
F56B – 10 Amp Red ESP/ESC
F57 – – Not Used
F58 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Mod / Power
Transfer Unit *
F59 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle *
F60 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Cargo APO
F61 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Stop/Turn *
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Transfer Unit *
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Left Stop/Turn *
F64 – 15 Amp Blue RT HID Headlamp *
F65 – – Not Used
F66 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/SGW
F67 – 10 Amp Red
Haptic Lane Feedback Module
(HALF) / Parktronics System
(PTS)/Drivers Assist System
Module (DASM)
F68 – – Not Used
F69 – – Not Used
F70 – – Not Used
F71 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F72 – 10 Amp Red Heated Mirrors *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F73 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F74 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup *
F75 – 5 Amp Tan Overhead Console / RR ISC
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow Uconnect/DCSD/Telematics
F77A – 10 Amp Red
RR Entertainment Screen 1 & 2/
Media HUB 1 & 2/3rd Row USB
Charge Only/2nd Row USB Charge
Only/Vacuum Cleaner SW/3rd Row
Recline ST SW/LT & RT Stow N Go
SW/LT & RT Sliding Door SW
Backlight
F77B – 10 Amp Red Rain Sensor/Sunroof /CRVMM
F78A – 15 Amp Blue
Transmission Control Module
(TCM)/ E-Shifter
F78B – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F79 – 10 Amp Red
ICS/Front And Rear
HVAC/ SCCM/ EPB
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
F80 – – Not Used
F81 – – Not Used
F82 – – Not Used
F83
20 Amp Blue – TT Park Lights *
30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer Pump *
F84 30 Amp Pink – Drivetrain Control MOD *
F85 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F86 – – Not Used
F87 – – Not Used
F88 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats *
F89 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats *
F90 – – Not Used
F91 – 15 Amp Blue
Front Ventilated Seats/Heated
Steering Wheel *
F92 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F93 – – Not Used
F94 40 Amp Green – ESC Motor Pump
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
***30 Amp mini fuse is substituted for 25 Amp Circuit Breaker.
F95A – 10 Amp Red USB Charge Port — ACC RUN
F95B – 10 Amp Red
Selectable Fuse Location – USB IP
(Direct) B+
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
(Airbag)
F97 – 10 Amp Red
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
(Airbag)
F98 – 15 Amp Blue Left HID Headlamp *
F99 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Module *
F100A – 10 Amp Red AHLM *
F100B – 10 Amp Red
Rear Camera/LBSS/RBSS/CVPM/
Humidity Sensor/In Vehicle
Temperature Sensor *
Circuit Breakers
CB1 25 Amp Power Seats (Driver)
CB2 25 Amp *** Power Seats (Pass)
CB3 25 Amp
FRT PWR Window W/O Door Nodes +
RR PWR Window Lockout
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Blade Fuse Description
* If Equipped
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center & Rear Dome Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Center & Rear Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Door Courtesy Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Front Header Reading Lamps – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Instrument Cluster Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Liftgate Lamp(s) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Overhead Console Reading Lamps LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Removable Console Lamp – If Equipped LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Visor Vanity Lamps 6501966
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Halogen Head Lamp
Reflector Low Beam — H11LL
Reflector High Beam — 9005LL
Front Turn Signal Lamp PWY24WNA
Front Side Marker Lamp W3W
Front Park Lamp PWY24WNA
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Stop/Turn Signal Lamp W21/5WLL
Rear Tail/Side Marker Lamp
Rear Tail - Body Side - W21/5WLL
Rear Tail - Liftgate - W5WLL
Rear Side Marker Lamp W3W
Backup Lamp W21W
License Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP
See below steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Twist the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly counterclockwise, and then remove
the front turn signal lamp assembly from the
lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal Lamp Socket
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and insert the
replacement bulb.
4. Install the front turn signal lamp socket
assembly into the housing, and rotate the front
turn signal lamp socket clockwise to lock it in
place.
FRONT AND REAR SIDE MARKER LAMPS
See below steps to replace:
1. Remove the three fasteners from the inner
wheel liner and carefully peel back liner for
access.
Inner Wheel Liner Fasteners
2. Firmly grab the front side marker lamp socket
and rotate a quarter turn counterclockwise to
remove it from the lamp assembly.
Front Side Marker Lamp Bulb Removal
3. Remove bulb from the front side marker lamp
socket and replace with a new bulb.
4. Install front side marker lamp socket in lamp
assembly and rotate a quarter turn clockwise
to lock into place.
5. Position the inner wheel liner in place and
install the three fasteners.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
“P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
pean design standards. Tires designed to this
standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. The size designation for
LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
“S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure The manufacturer recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in this
manual Ú page 134.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross
axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading,
and trailer towing, Ú page 134.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. The combined weight of
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
configurations and number and size of occu-
pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
865 lbs (392 kg).
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping distance.
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
your vehicle. Never overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can
result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
can cause damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to
drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated
even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire
sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change.
Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure
inside a garage, especially in the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature
condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build-up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct
tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your
tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
(6 mm).
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
size and service description (Load Index and
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited driving
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat
tire is changed after driving with underinflated tire
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode Ú page 207.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
tires to help you in determining when your tires
should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the tire should be replaced
Ú page 322.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres-
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in
the need for earlier tire replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly
recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing
tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires
from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of
many characteristics. They should be inspected
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
pressures. The manufacturer strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
originals in size, quality and performance when
replacement is needed Ú page 321. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found
on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire
Safety Information section of this manual for more
information relating to the Load Index and Speed
Symbol of a tire Ú page 313.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or
two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
specifications match those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after
six years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Failure to follow this warning can result in
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and
have a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for your
vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
dictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a
smaller load index could result in tire over-
loading and failure. You could lose control and
have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season tires.
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S,
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient
temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads
are covered with ice or snow. For more
information, contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the
tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow
tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the original
equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
should not be operated at sustained speeds over
75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and
cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice,
skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
laws should be checked before using these tire
types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead
of a spare tire Ú page 267.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 142.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different
size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions.
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in
severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash with a compact or limited use temporary
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than one
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any
given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before
lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
collapsible spare tire.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. This spare tire may have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire
needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on
the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle
at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion.
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces are
not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from
corroding and tarnishing.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
more than the speed listed on the limited use
spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and
equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for
aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel
cleaners and automatic car washes may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar®
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(maximum projection beyond tire
profile or equivalent)
L
LX
LXI
Front 235/65R17 9 mm Cable/Chain
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For these
reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as
those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should
be corrected prior to rotation being performed
Ú page 281.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some directional
tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe
the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only traction
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further
use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
Autosock traction devices do not require
retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed of
the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible
to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must
be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap
solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to
clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar®
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not
scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
of paint and decals.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery
and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace
the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and
if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision,
or if you have questions regarding seat belt or
retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an
authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
8
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage
the leather upholstery and should be removed
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is
designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer
recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather
seats, as damage to the seat may result.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 332
333
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument
panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle
through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems
loses normal capability, the remaining system will
still function. However, there will be some loss of
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine
off) the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system
operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lb
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.5 19 mm
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 333
334 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt
(do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of
gasoline with a lower than recommended octane
number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand of
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 334
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 335
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emission regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and performance
when using high quality unleaded regular
gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air
quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide improved performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component corro-
sion
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane
(LP) may result in damage to the engine,
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol,
or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems, damage critical fuel
system components, cause emissions to exceed
the applicable standard, and/or cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
observe pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 335
336 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents,
corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and
fuel system deposits. When available,
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent gasoline is
recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents
should be avoided. Many of these materials
intended for gum and varnish removal may contain
active solvents or similar ingredients. These can
harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair
engine performance and damage the
emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may
require immediate service. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
mended. Most of these products contain high
concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 336
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 337
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 19 Gallons 71 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine
13.1 Quarts — Standard Duty Cooling
13.4 Quarts — Heavy Duty Cooling
12.4 Liters — Standard Duty Cooling
12.7 Liters — Heavy Duty Cooling
* Includes heater and coolant reservoir filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material
Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar®, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use
filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol (Do not use E-85).
9
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 337
338 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Tech-
nology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be
compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 338
339
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a
clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the items
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your
vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you
get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC’s
authorized dealers have the facilities,
factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They
want to know if you need assistance. If an
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number
(home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 247-9753
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
10
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 339
340 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (800) 247-9753
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommu-
nication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its
customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired
customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs relay
service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay
Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of
unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed
by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about the service
contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
please refer to the contract documents, and
contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 340
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 341
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
10
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 341
342 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either
the website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features.
They show exactly how to find and correct
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and
a complete list of all tools and equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through
Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with Innovation, Science and Economic
Development Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 342
343
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes.........................................333
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............297
Additives, Fuel ...............................................336
Adjust
Down........................................................... 43
Forward ....................................................... 43
Rearward..................................................... 43
Up................................................................ 43
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................187
Air Bag ...........................................................222
Air Bag Operation ......................................224
Air Bag Warning Light...................... 222, 224
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................229
Enhanced Accident Response......... 232, 280
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................280
Front Air Bag .............................................224
If Deployment Occurs................................232
Knee Impact Bolsters................................229
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............233
Maintenance .............................................233
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............222
Side Air Bags .............................................229
Transporting Pets......................................252
Air Bag Light ............................... 101, 222, 252
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 288
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 290
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........................... 290
Air Conditioner System ................................. 290
Air Conditioning Filter..............................73, 290
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips.......................72
Air Filter ........................................................ 288
Air Pressure
Tires ......................................................... 320
Alarm
Arm The System ..........................................20
Disarm The System .....................................20
Security Alarm .......................................... 104
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 8
Android Auto ........................................ 189, 190
Android auto™ ¹............................................ 189
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 297, 337
Disposal ................................................... 298
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 194
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 104
Apple CarPlay....................................... 189, 192
Apple carplay®
b
...................................... 191
Ashtray.............................................................81
Assist, Hill Start............................................. 198
Audio Jack........................................................78
Audio Settings............................................... 174
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 147
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................82
Automatic Dimming Mirror........................49, 50
Automatic Headlights.......................................56
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)..............72
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 118
Automatic Transmission................................ 119
Adding Fluid..................................... 300, 338
Fluid And Filter Change............................. 300
Fluid Change............................................. 300
Fluid Level Check...................................... 300
Fluid Type ........................................ 300, 338
Special Additives ...................................... 300
AutoPark ....................................................... 111
AUX Cord ..........................................................78
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........79
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 338
B
Back-Up Camera ........................................... 132
Battery .................................................102, 286
Charging System Light.............................. 102
Jump Starting ........................................... 272
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................13
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 343
344
Battery Saver Feature...................................... 57
Belts, Seat .....................................................252
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................200
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .....182
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................292
B-Pillar Location.............................................316
Brake Assist System ......................................195
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................195
Brake Fluid ....................................................338
Brake System ...................................... 299, 333
Anti-Lock (ABS)..........................................333
Fluid Check ..................................... 299, 338
Master Cylinder .........................................299
Parking......................................................115
Warning Light ............................................101
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................119
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 58
Bulb Replacement............................... 309, 311
Bulbs, Light................................. 254, 309, 311
C
Camera..........................................................132
Camera, Rear ................................................132
Capacities, Fluid ............................................337
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...........................................................134
Oil (Engine)................................................285
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................298
Car Washes................................................... 330
Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 254
Cargo
Vehicle Loading ...........................................86
Cargo Area Cover .............................................86
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier ...........................................86
Cargo Load Floor..............................................86
Cargo Tie-Downs..............................................86
CD................................................................. 176
Cellular Phone .............................................. 193
Certification Label......................................... 134
Chains, Tire................................................... 327
Change Oil Indicator ........................................93
Changing A Flat Tire...................................... 259
Chart, Tire Sizing........................................... 313
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)......................... 109
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 252
Checks, Safety .............................................. 252
Child Restraint .............................................. 234
Child Restraints
Booster Seats........................................... 237
Center Seat LATCH ................................... 244
Child Seat Installation ..................... 246, 248
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 245
Infant And Child Restraints....................... 235
Lower Anchors And Tethers
For Children ......................................... 238
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 236
Seating Positions...................................... 238
Using The Top Tether Anchorage .............. 249
Cigar Lighter.....................................................81
Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 335
Cleaning
Wheels...................................................... 325
Climate Control ................................................60
Automatic ....................................................60
Manual ........................................................66
Rear......................................................65, 70
Coat Hook ........................................................77
Cold Weather Operation................................ 113
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 324
Computer, Trip/Travel................................... 100
Contract, Service........................................... 340
Controls ........................................................ 168
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)............ 298
Cooling System ............................................. 296
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 297
Coolant Level............................................ 298
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 337
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 298
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 296
Inspection........................................ 296, 298
Points To Remember ................................ 298
Pressure Cap ............................................ 298
Radiator Cap............................................. 298
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....297, 337
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 330
Cruise Control ............................................... 125
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 344
345
Cruise Light ...................................................107
Customer Assistance .....................................339
Cybersecurity.................................................147
D
Daytime Running Lights................................... 55
Dealer Service ...............................................287
Defroster, Windshield....................................252
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 19
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers.............................. 59
Deleting A Phone ...........................................183
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................108
Dimmer Switch
Headlight..................................................... 55
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)................................................286
Disable Vehicle Towing..................................278
Disc Drive ......................................................176
Disconnecting................................................183
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant).......................298
Disturb...........................................................185
Door Ajar.............................................. 102, 103
Door Ajar Light..................................... 102, 103
Drag & Drop...................................................166
Driver Memory Presets ..................................174
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 29
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water .....................................145
E
Electric Brake Control System....................... 195
Anti-Lock Brake System............................ 194
Traction Control System ........................... 200
Electric Parking Brake................................... 115
Electric Remote Mirrors ...................................51
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 196
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 102
Emergency Braking....................................... 207
Emergency Gas Can Refueling...................... 274
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 255
Jacking ............................................ 259, 261
Jump Starting ........................................... 272
Overheating.............................................. 275
Towing ...................................................... 278
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 109
Engine........................................................... 285
Air Cleaner................................................ 288
Block Heater............................................. 114
Break-In Recommendations..................... 114
Checking Oil Level .................................... 286
Compartment ........................................... 285
Compartment Identification...................... 285
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................. 337
Cooling ..................................................... 296
Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 254
Fails To Start ............................................ 113
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 113
Fuel Requirements ................................... 335
Oil .................................................... 288, 337
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 285
Oil Filter .................................................... 288
Oil Selection.....................................288, 337
Oil Synthetic.............................................. 288
Overheating .............................................. 275
Starting..................................................... 110
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................232, 280
Ethanol.......................................................... 335
Exhaust Gas Cautions................................... 254
Exhaust System ................................... 254, 295
Exterior Lighting ..................................... 55, 311
Exterior Lights ......................55, 254, 309, 311
F
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................................ 288
Air Conditioning ................................. 73, 290
Engine Oil ........................................ 288, 337
Engine Oil Disposal................................... 288
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................................ 255
Turn Signals.....................55, 107, 254, 311
Flash-To-Pass............................................55, 56
Flat Tire Changing .......................259, 311, 323
Flat Tire Stowage ........................266, 311, 323
Flooded Engine Starting................................ 113
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 337
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 254
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 345
346
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................299
Engine Oil ..................................................286
Fluid, Brake ...................................................338
Fog Lights ................................................. 55, 57
Fold In Floor (Stow ‘n Go) Seating.................... 38
Fold-Flat Seats................................................. 29
Forward Collision Warning.............................204
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................277
Front Position Light........................................311
Fuel ..................................................... 334, 335
Additives ...................................................336
Clean Air....................................................335
Ethanol......................................................335
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)...................................134
Gasoline .......................................... 334, 335
Materials Added........................................336
Methanol...................................................335
Octane Rating ........................ 334, 335, 337
Requirements ...........................................335
Specifications............................................337
Tank Capacity............................................337
Fuses.............................................................300
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................... 52
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................134
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................334
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................335
Gasoline, Reformulated.................................335
Gear Ranges................................................. 120
Glass Cleaning.............................................. 332
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 136
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating......................... 136
GVWR............................................................ 135
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water .................. 145
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................. 255
Head Restraints...............................................45
Headlights .......................................................55
Cleaning ................................................... 330
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........55
Lights On Reminder..............................55, 57
Passing.................................................55, 56
Switch..........................................................55
Time Delay...................................................55
Heated Mirrors.................................................49
Heated Seats...................................................44
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 114
Hill Start Assist.............................................. 198
Hitches
Trailer Towing ........................................... 138
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener).....................52
Hood Prop........................................................83
Hood Release ..................................................83
Hook, Coat .......................................................77
I
Ignition.............................................................16
Switch..........................................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 49, 255
Instrument Cluster ...........................................91
Descriptions.............................................. 107
Display.........................................................91
Display Controls...........................................92
KeySense Message .....................................93
Menu Items .................................................94
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 332
Interior And Instrument Lights .........................58
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 331
Interior Lights...................................................58
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................59
Introduction ....................................................... 7
J
Jack Location ................................................ 260
Jack Operation .............................................. 259
Jump Starting................................................ 272
K
Key Fob............................................................12
Arm The System...........................................20
Disarm The Alarm ........................................20
Programming Additional Key Fobs...............14
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................13
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 346
347
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................................... 14
Keyless Enter ‘n Go ......................................... 22
Passive Entry............................................... 22
Keys................................................................. 12
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals........................ 55
Lane Change Assist .................................. 55, 57
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................213
Latches..........................................................254
Hood ........................................................... 83
Lead Free Gasoline........................................335
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................254
Life Of Tires ...................................................322
Liftgate ............................................................ 84
Power .......................................................... 85
Light Bulbs........................................... 254, 311
Lighter
Cigar............................................................ 81
Lights.............................................................254
Air Bag.................................... 101, 222, 252
Battery Saver...............................................57
Brake Assist Warning ................................198
Brake Warning ..........................................101
Bulb Replacement........................... 309, 311
Cruise........................................................107
Daytime Running.........................................55
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...........................55
Engine Temperature Warning................... 103
Exterior ............................................ 254, 311
Fog ..............................................................57
Headlights ............................................55, 56
High Beam/Low Beam Select......................55
Instrument Cluster.......................................55
Intensity Control ..........................................58
Interior.........................................................58
Lights On Reminder..............................55, 57
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....... 105
Park.......................................................... 107
Passing.................................................55, 56
Reading .......................................................58
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 103
Security Alarm .......................................... 104
Service ..................................................... 309
Side Marker.............................................. 311
Traction Control........................................ 198
Turn Signals .................... 55, 107, 254, 311
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................ 103, 107
Load Floor, Cargo.............................................86
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .......................99
Load Shed Battery Saver On............................99
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............99
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor...............99
Loading Vehicle...................................... 86, 134
Tires.......................................................... 316
Low Tire Pressure System............................. 207
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 292
Lug Nuts........................................................ 333
Luggage Carrier................................................86
M
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 286
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 281
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine).....................................105, 109
Manual
Park Release ............................................ 276
Service...................................................... 342
Map/Reading Lights ........................................58
Marker Lights, Side....................................... 311
Media Hub .......................................................78
Media Mode.................................................. 176
Memory Seat....................................................51
Methanol....................................................... 335
Mini-Trip Computer ....................................... 100
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 347
348
Mirrors............................................................. 49
Automatic Dimming.............................. 49, 50
Electric Remote........................................... 51
Exterior Folding ........................................... 52
Heated ........................................................ 49
Outside................................................. 49, 51
Rearview ............................................49, 255
Vanity .......................................................... 50
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle .......................................................... 8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................207
Mopar Parts...................................................341
MP3 Control .................................................... 78
Multi-Function Control Lever............................ 55
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period..........................114
O
Occupant Restraints......................................211
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ... 334, 335, 337
Oil Change Indicator ........................................ 93
Reset........................................................... 93
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................288
Oil Filter, Selection.........................................288
Oil Pressure Light ..........................................103
Oil, Engine ........................................... 288, 337
Capacity ....................................................337
Checking ...................................................286
Dipstick .....................................................286
Disposal ................................................... 288
Filter ................................................ 288, 337
Filter Disposal........................................... 288
Identification Logo.................................... 288
Materials Added To .................................. 288
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 103
Recommendation............................ 288, 337
Synthetic .................................................. 288
Viscosity ................................................... 337
Onboard Diagnostic System.......................... 108
Operating Precautions .................................. 108
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual........................................ 342
Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................49, 51
Overheating, Engine...................................... 275
P
Paint Care..................................................... 330
Pair (link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone
b
........................................ 180
Parking Brake ............................................... 115
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 127
Passive Entry ...................................................22
Personalized Main Menu Bar........................ 166
Pets .............................................................. 252
Phone Mode ................................................. 178
Placard, Tire And Loading Information.......... 316
Power
Brakes ...................................................... 333
Mirrors.........................................................51
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).................79
Seats ...........................................................42
Steering .................................................... 123
Power Seats
Down ...........................................................43
Forward .......................................................43
Rearward .....................................................43
Up ................................................................43
Power Sliding Door
On / Off Switch .....................................25, 85
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 218
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 259
Presets.......................................................... 174
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 219
R
Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 320
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)............ 298
Radio
Presets ..................................................... 174
Radio Controls .............................................. 168
Radio Mode................................................... 168
Radio Operation...................................168, 193
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 167
Rear Air Conditioning ................................65, 70
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 203
Rear ParkSense System................................ 127
Rear Seat Removal ..........................................31
Rear View.........................................................49
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 348
349
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 30
Recreational Towing ......................................144
Reformulated Gasoline..................................335
Refrigerant ....................................................290
Release, Hood ................................................. 83
Reminder, Lights On........................................ 55
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................212
Remote Control
Starting System........................................... 17
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm............................................. 20
Disarm The Alarm........................................ 20
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 14
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........167
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features..................................................19
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 19
Remote Starting System.................................. 17
Replacement Bulbs .......................................309
Replacement Tires.........................................322
Reporting Safety Defects...............................341
Restraints, Child ............................................234
Restraints, Head.............................................. 45
Roof Luggage Rack.......................................... 86
Rotation, Tires ...............................................328
S
Safety ........................................................... 166
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 252
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 253
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 341
Safety Features............................................. 166
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 311
Safety Tips .................................................... 252
Safety, Exhaust Gas...................................... 254
Satellite Radio .............................................. 169
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 174
Schedule, Maintenance................................ 281
Seat Belt Reminder....................................... 103
Seat Belts ............................................ 212, 252
Adjustable Shoulder Belt.......................... 215
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage..... 215
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage............................................ 215
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........... 219
Child Restraints........................................ 234
Energy Management Feature ................... 219
Extender ................................................... 218
Front Seat...............................212, 213, 214
Inspection................................................. 252
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 214
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 215
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 213
Operating Instructions.............................. 214
Pregnant Women...................................... 218
Pretensioners ........................................... 219
Rear Seat.................................................. 213
Reminder.................................................. 212
Seat Belt Extender.................................... 218
Seat Belt Pretensioner.............................. 219
Untwisting Procedure................................ 215
Seat Belts Maintenance................................ 331
Seats..................................................29, 43, 44
Adjustment .............................29, 30, 31, 43
Bench ..........................................................31
Heated.........................................................44
Power...........................................................42
Rear Folding ................................................29
Reclining......................................................30
Seatback Release..........................29, 30, 31
Stow ‘n Go (Fold in Floor).............................38
Tilting....................................................29, 30
Security Alarm............................................... 104
Arm The System...........................................20
Disarm The System......................................20
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 337
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................15
Service Assistance ........................................ 339
Service Contract............................................ 340
Service Manuals ........................................... 342
Settings, Audio.............................................. 174
Shifting
Automatic Transmission ........................... 119
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 213
Side View Mirror Adjustment............................49
Signals, Turn ........................55, 107, 254, 311
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 349
350
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................169
Favorites ...................................................172
Replay .......................................................171
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ..........................................172
Favorites ...................................................172
Replay .......................................................171
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .............................327
Snow Tires.....................................................323
Spare Tire Changing ......................................259
Spare Tire Stowage .......................................266
Spare Tires ........................260, 323, 324, 325
Specifications
Oil..............................................................337
Speed Control
Cancel .......................................................126
Resume.....................................................126
Starting...................................................17, 110
Button ......................................................... 16
Cold Weather ............................................113
Engine Fails To Start .................................113
Remote ....................................................... 17
Starting And Operating ..................................110
Starting Procedures.......................................110
Steering ........................................................ 123
Tilt Column ..................................................28
Wheel, Heated.............................................28
Wheel, Tilt....................................................28
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 167
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ...... 167
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 174
Stow ‘n Go (Fold In Floor) Seats.......................38
Stuck, Freeing............................................... 277
Sunglasses Storage .........................................74
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 222
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 200
Symbol Glossary ................................................ 8
Synthetic Engine Oil...................................... 288
System, Remote Starting .................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ..........................28
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............72
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo....................................86
Tilt Steering Column ........................................28
Time Delay
Headlight.....................................................55
Tire And Loading Information Placard........... 316
Tire Markings ................................................ 312
Tire Safety Information.................................. 311
Tire Service Kit.............................................. 267
Tire Stowage ................................................. 266
Tires ......................... 253, 319, 323, 324, 329
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................... 322
Air Pressure .............................................. 319
Chains ...................................................... 327
Changing .................................................. 259
Compact Spare......................................... 324
General Information ...............319, 323, 324
High Speed ............................................... 320
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 320
Jacking............................................. 259, 261
Life Of Tires .............................................. 322
Load Capacity ........................................... 316
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).................................. 95, 106, 207
Quality Grading ......................................... 329
Radial ....................................................... 320
Replacement ............................................ 322
Rotation.................................................... 328
Safety ..............................................311, 319
Sizes ......................................................... 313
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 350
351
Snow Tires.................................................323
Spare Tires....................260, 323, 324, 325
Spinning ....................................................321
Trailer Towing............................................142
Tread Wear Indicators...............................321
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................333
To Open Hood.................................................. 83
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................141
Towing ...........................................................136
Disabled Vehicle........................................278
Guide.........................................................139
Recreational..............................................144
Weight.......................................................139
Towing Behind A Motorhome.........................144
Traction .........................................................145
Traction Control .............................................200
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................200
Trailer Towing ................................................136
Hitches......................................................138
Minimum Requirements............................141
Tips ...........................................................143
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................141
Wiring........................................................142
Trailer Towing Guide ......................................139
Trailer Weight ................................................139
Transaxle
Automatic ................................................. 118
Operation ................................................. 118
Transmission ................................................ 119
Automatic ........................................ 119, 300
Maintenance ............................................ 300
Transporting Pets.......................................... 252
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 321
Turn Signals.................................. 55, 107, 311
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features ................................. 184
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone................................... 187
Uconnect Settings .......................................19
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With 8.4-Inch
Display.......................................................... 148
Uconnect Phone .................................. 180, 182
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress..................... 185
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress................ 185
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 189
Call Continuation...................................... 186
Call Controls ............................................. 184
Call Termination ....................................... 186
Cancel Command ..................................... 180
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing..... 182
Help Command......................................... 180
Join Calls .................................................. 186
Making A Phone Or Audio Device
A Favorite ............................................. 183
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress................................. 186
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 184
Natural Speech......................................... 180
Operation.................................................. 179
Overview ................................................... 178
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A
Mobile Phone ....................................... 180
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming
Audio Device ........................................ 182
Phonebook Download............................... 183
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............... 186
Power-Up .................................................. 189
Recent Calls.............................................. 185
Redial ....................................................... 186
11
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 351
352
To Remove A Favorite ...............................184
Toggling Between Calls .............................186
Touch-Tone Number Entry.........................185
Transfer Call To And From
Mobile Phone........................................187
Voice Command ........................................187
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ...... 19, 22
Passive Entry Programming......................... 22
Uconnect System...........................................164
Umbrella Holder .............................................. 75
Uniform Tire Quality Grades...........................329
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................335
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................215
USB ................................................................. 78
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................50
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 333
Vehicle Loading ................................... 134, 316
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 287
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 8
Voice Command............................ 48, 190, 192
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................48
W
Warning Lights
Blue.......................................................... 107
Green ....................................................... 107
Red........................................................... 101
White ........................................................ 107
Yellow ....................................................... 104
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ................. 105
Warning Lights And Messages...................... 101
Warranty Information .................................... 341
Washers, Windshield .................................... 286
Washing Vehicle............................................ 330
Water
Driving Through ........................................ 145
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care........................... 325
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 325
Wind Buffeting .................................................83
Window Fogging...............................................73
Windows ..........................................................81
Power...........................................................81
Windshield Defroster .................................... 252
Windshield Washers .............................. 59, 286
Fluid.......................................................... 286
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 292
Wipers Blade Replacement........................... 292
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................59
Wrecker Towing............................................. 278
21_RUV_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 352
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Chrysler
brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Chrysler
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend
or use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Chrysler is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
Second Edition V2
_RUV_OM_EN_US
SCAN FOR THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or
scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Chrysler brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make
and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “Chrysler” (U.S. residents only).
owners.mopar.ca
CanadaU. S.
mopar.com/om
